P r ogr a m m er ’s Gu id e
Agilen t Tech n ologies E MC Ser ies
Sp ect r u m An a lyzer s
Th is gu id e d ocu m e n t s fir m w a r e r evision A.08.xx
Th is m a n u a l p r ovid es d ocu m e n ta t ion for t h e follow in g in str u m en t s:
E 7401A (9 k H z - 1.5 GH z)
E 7402A (9 k H z - 3.0 GH z)
E 7403A (9 k H z - 6.7 GH z)
E 7404A (9 k H z - 13.2 GH z)
E 7405A (9 k H z - 26.5 GH z)
Ma n u fa ct u r in g P a r t Nu m b er : E 7401-90053
Su p e r se d es: E7401-90028
P r in t ed in USA
Decem b er 2001
© Copyright 1999 - 2001 Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective earth ground
incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall be inserted only in a
socket outlet provided with a protected earth contact. Any interruption of the
protective conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the
product dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
WARNING
WARNING
No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers.
If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by the
equipment could be impaired. This product must be used in a normal
condition (in which all means for protection are intact) only.
CAUTION
Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with this product. Failure to
ensure adequate grounding may cause product damage.
Warranty
This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in
material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of shipment.
During the warranty period, Agilent Technologies will, at its option, either repair
or replace products which prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility
designated by Agilent Technologies. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to
Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to
return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties,
and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country.
Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by
Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming
instructions when properly installed on that instrument. Agilent Technologies does
not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or
inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing,
unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental
specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. AGILENT
TECHNOLOGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Should Agilent have a negotiated contract with the User and should any of the
contract terms conflict with these terms, the contract terms shall control.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT,
OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
Where to Find the Latest Information
Documentation is updated periodically. For the latest information about Agilent
Technologies EMC Analyzers, including firmware upgrades and application
information, please visit the following Internet URL:
http://www.agilent.com/find/emc
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Creating Valid Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Special Characters in Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Parameters in Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Improving Measurement Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Turn off the display updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disable auto alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Select phase noise performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Use binary data format instead of ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Minimize the number of GPIB transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Avoid unnecessary use of *RST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Minimize DUT/instrument setup changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
GPIB Instrument Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
GPIB Command Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Overview of RS-232 (Option 1AX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Settings for the Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Handshake and Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Character Format Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Modem Line Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Data Transfer Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Printer Setup and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Interconnection and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Testing Printer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
What are the Status Registers? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
How Do You Access the Status Registers? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using the Service Request (SRQ) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting and Querying the Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Details of Bits in All Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Status Byte Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Service Request Enable Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Standard Event Status Event Enable Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
STATus:OPERation Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
STATus:QUEStionable Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Questionable Status Power Condition and Event Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Questionable Status Integrity Event Condition and Enable Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
List of Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Typical Example Program Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Linking to VTL Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Compiling and Linking a VTL Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Including the VISA Declarations File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Opening a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Device Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Addressing a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Closing a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (RS-232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Using Limit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Measuring Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Status Register–Determine When a Measurement is Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Determine if an Error has Occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Calibration Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Standard Event Status Register Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Identification Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Instrument State Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Operation Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Query Instrument Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Service Request Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Read Status Byte Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Self Test Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Wait-to-Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
ABORt Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
CALCulate Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
NdBpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
NdBresults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
NdBstate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Calculate Correction at Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Test Current Trace Data Against all Limit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Add Measure to List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Add Marker to List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Set Comment for Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Set Comment for Current Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Set Comment for Marked Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Delete Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Turn Signal List On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Retrieve Signals in List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Mark Selected Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Position Cursor to Signal List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Specify Sort Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Delete All Correction Sets in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Control Limit Line Amplitude Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Set Fixed or Relative Limit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Control Limit Line Frequency Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Define Limit Line Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Merge Additional Values into the Existing Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Set the Margin Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Display the Limit Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Control Limit Line Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Select the Type of Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Continuous Peaking Marker Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Frequency Counter Marker Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Frequency Counter Marker Automatic Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Frequency Counter Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Marker Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Marker Next Peak (Maximum) Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Marker Peak (Minimum) Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Marker Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Define Peak Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Set Center Frequency to the Marker Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Set Start Frequency to the Marker Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Set Center Frequency Step Size to the Marker Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Set Stop Frequency to the Marker Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Marker On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Marker Table On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Marker to Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Marker to Trace Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Continuous Signal Tracking Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Marker X Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Span Markers Center Frequency X Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Marker X-Axis Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
CALCulate:NTData Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
CALibration Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Align All Instrument Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Automatic Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Return to the Default Alignment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Query the Internal or External Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Select the Frequency Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Align the RF Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Calibrate the Tracking Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
COUPle the Function to Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Display Viewing Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Date and Time Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Date and Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Turn the Full Screen Display On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Display Line On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
IF Gain Auto/Reference Level Auto Ranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Normalized Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Normalized Reference Level Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Trace Y-Axis Amplitude Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Trace Y-Axis Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Trace Y-Axis Reference Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Vertical Axis Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Byte Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Numeric Data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
HCOPy Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Abort the Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Printer Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Select Report Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Print Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Select a Signal List to Include in a Report (Delta) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Color Hard Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Print a Hard Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Page Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Printed Page Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
INITiate Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Continuous or Single Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Take New Data Acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Abort Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Pause the Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Restart the Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Resume the Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Input Port Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
MEASure Group of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fetch Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Measure Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Read Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Get Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Measure at Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Measure at Marker and Add to List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Setting Max/Min On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Max/Min View ->Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Measure Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Remeasure Current Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
MMEMory Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Catalog the Selected Memory Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Copy a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Move Data to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Delete a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Load a Limit Line from Memory to the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Load an Instrument State from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Load a Trace From a File to the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Make a Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Store (Load/Save) a Signal List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Store a Corrections Table to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Store Measurement Results in a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Store a Screen Image in a Graphic File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Store an Instrument State in a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Turn Output On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Clear the Current Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Set the Average Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Turn Averaging On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Turn Automatic Averaging On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Resolution Bandwidth Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Resolution Bandwidth Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Video Bandwidth Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio Mode Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Resolution Bandwidth Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Delete All Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Perform Amplitude Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Set Amplitude Correction Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Perform Amplitude Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Input Impedance Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
[:SENSe]:DEMod Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Demodulation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Demod Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Demod View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Automatic Detection Type Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Type of Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Type of EMI Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
EMI View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Range Immediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Unrange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
[:SENSe]:EMI Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Auto Measure Average On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Auto Measure Peak On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Setting the Dwell Time for Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Setting the Dwell Time for Quasi Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Setting the Dwell Time for Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Auto Measure Margin On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Center Frequency Step Size Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Center Frequency Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Full Frequency Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Start Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Stop Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Frequency Synthesis State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
[:SENSe]:POWer Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Enable/Disable QPD X10 Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Input Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Input Port Attenuator Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Input Port Power Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Preselector Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Automatic Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Sweep Time Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Time Gating Delay (Option 1D6 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Time Gate Length (Option 1D6 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Time Gate Level (Option 1D6 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Time Gate Polarity (Option 1D6 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Time Gate Trigger Type (Option 1D6 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
SOURce Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Sets the Output Power Offset Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Source Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Automatic Source Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Sets the Source Output Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Set the Source Sweep Power Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Set the Output Power Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Set the Source Sweep Power Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Output Power Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
STATus Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Operation Condition Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Operation Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Operation Event Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Operation Positive Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Preset the Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Questionable Calibration Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Questionable Calibration Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Questionable Calibration Event Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Questionable Calibration Negative Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Questionable Calibration Positive Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Questionable Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Questionable Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Questionable Frequency Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Questionable Frequency Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Questionable Frequency Event Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Questionable Frequency Negative Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Questionable Frequency Positive Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Questionable Integrity Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Questionable Integrity Event Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Questionable Integrity Positive Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Questionable Negative Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Questionable Power Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Questionable Power Event Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Questionable Power Negative Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Questionable Power Positive Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Questionable Positive Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
SYSTem Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Serial Port DTR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Serial Port Baud Rate Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Serial Port Transmit Pace Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Hardware Configuration Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Display the Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
System Configuration Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Display System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Locate SCPI Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Host Identification Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
License Key – Install Application/Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Delete a License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Query Instrument Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Power On Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Power On Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Persistent State Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Preset Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Save User Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Speaker Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Set Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
SCPI Version Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
TRACe Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Copy Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Transfer Trace Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Trace Math Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Query Number of Peaks Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Peak Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Smooth Trace Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Number of Points for Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Trace Math Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Trace Math Subtract From Display Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Select Trace Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
External Trigger, Line Trigger Delay Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
External Trigger, Line Trigger Delay Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Trigger Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Trigger Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Video Trigger Level Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
UNIT Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Select Power Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation <ampl> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
*CAL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
*ESR?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
*LRN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
*OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
*SAV <register> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
*SRE?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
*STB?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
*TRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
*WAI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
:CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
:CALCulate:CORRection:ATFREquency? <freq> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD:MEASured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:COMMent:ALL <string>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:COMMent:CURRent <string>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:COMMent:MARKed <string>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:DELete ALL|CURRent|MARKed| <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:DISPlay:STATe?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:DISPlay[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:MARK ALL|CURRent|TOEnd|DUPLicate|LOWer|COMPlement <integer> . . . . . . . . 206
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:SORT
FREQuency|PEAK|QPEak|AVERage|LLINE1|LLINE2 ASCending|DESending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:View
COMMent|PEAK|QPEak|AVERage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency|TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE LOGarithmic| . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA <x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>{,<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>} . . . . . . . . . . 211
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA:MERGe <x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>{,<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>} . . . 213
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DELete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe OFF|ON|0|1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:TYPE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution <real>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE PARameter|MAXimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe:STATe OFF|ON|0|1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:CPEak[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:CPEak[:STATe]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt[:STATe]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum:LEFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum:RIGHt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE POSition|DELTa|BAND|SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRCKing[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRCKing[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN <param>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:READout FREQuency|TIME|ITIMe|PERiod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:READout? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN <param>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP <param>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:RLEVel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:STARt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
:CALibration:AUTO:MODE ALL|NRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
:CALibration:DATA:DEFault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse <setting>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:FINE?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:CALibration:FREQuency[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
:CALibration:FREQuency[:STATe]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
:CALibration:RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
:CALibration:RF? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
:CALibration:SOURce:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
:CALibration:SOURce:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
:CONFigure:EMI:AFRequency <freq><unit> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
:CONFigure:EMI:MARKer[1|2|3|4]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
:CONFigure:EMI:PEAKs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
:COUPle ALL|NONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
:DISPlay:ANGLe <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk:DATE:FORMat MDY|DMY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk:DATE:FORMat? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA <string> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
:DISPlay:MENU:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
:DISPlay:MENU:STATe?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:FREQuency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ampl> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]ASCii|INTeger,32|REAL,32|
REAL,64|UINTeger,16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
:HCOPy:ABORt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:HCOPy:EMI:ITEM:SLISt:DELTa1|DELTa2:PPEak|QPEak|AVERage
:STATe ON|OFF|1|0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
:HCOPy:EMI:ITEM:SLISt:PPEak|QPEak|AVERage|LLINe1|LLINe2| CORRection|UNCertainty|COM-
Ment:STATe ON|OFF|1|0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
:HCOPy:EMI:ITEM:SLISt:PPEak|QPEak|AVERage|LLINe1|LLINe2| CORRection|UNCertainty|COM-
Ment:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
:HCOPy:IMAGe:COLor[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
:HCOPy:IMAGe:COLor[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape|PORTrait. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
:HCOPy:PAGE:PRINts <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
:HCOPy:PAGE:PRINts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
:HCOPy:PAGE:SIZE A|B|A3|A4|LETTer|LEGal|EXECutive|LEDGer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
:HCOPy:PAGE:SIZE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
:HCOPy[:IMMediate] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
:INITiate:PAUSe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
:INPut:PROTection:CLEar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
:MEASure:<measurement>[n]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:MEASure:EMI:MMIN:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
:MEASure:EMI:MMIN:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
:MMEMory:CATalog? <drive> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
:MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<definite_length_block>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
:MMEMory:DATA? <file_name> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
:MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection ANTenna|CABLe|OTHer|USER,<file_name> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2,<file_name> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
:OUTPut[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
:OUTPut[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation <ampl>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
:SOURce:POWer:MODE FIXed|SWEep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
:SOURce:POWer:MODE?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
:SOURce:POWer:SPAN <rel_ampl>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
:SOURce:POWer:SPAN?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
:SOURce:POWer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
:SOURce:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] <ampl> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
:SOURce:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
:SOURce:POWer:SWEep? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
:SOURce:POWer:TRCKing <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
:SOURce:POWer:TRCKing?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <ampl> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] UP|DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle<integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
:STATus:PRESet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition <integer>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle?> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[1][:SELF]:ADDRess <integer>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:CONTrol:DTR OFF|ON|IBFull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:TRANsmit:PACE XON|NONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1][:RECeive]:PACE XON|NONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
:SYSTem:CONFigure:HARDware:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
:SYSTem:CONFigure:HARDware:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
:SYSTem:CONFigure:HARDware? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
:SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
:SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
:SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
:SYSTem:DATE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
:SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
:SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:SYSTem:LKEY <“option”>, <“license key”> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
:SYSTem:LKEY:DELete <“option”> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
:SYSTem:LKEY? <“option”> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
:SYSTem:PRESet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE FACTory|USER|MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
:SYSTem:PRESet[:USER]:SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
:SYSTem:VERSion? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
:TRACe:EXCHange <trace_1>,<trace_2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
:TRACe:MATH:ADD <destination_trace>,<source_trace1>,<source_trace2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
:TRACe:MATH:MEAN? <trace> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:POINts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT AMPLitude|FREQuency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK[:DATA]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth <trace> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth:POINts <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth:POINts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
:TRACe:MATH:SUBTract <destination_trace>,<source_trace1>,<source_trace2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
:TRACe:MATH:SUBTract:DLINe <trace>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
:TRACe[:DATA] <trace_name>|RAWTRACE,<definite_length_
block>|<comma_separated_ASCII_data> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
:TRACe[:DATA]? <trace_name> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
:TRIG:SEQ:OFFS 1.0s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <ampl>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
:UNIT:POWer DBM|DBMV|DBUV|DBUA|V|W|A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
:UNIT:POWer?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
[:SENSe]:AVERage:CLEar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt <integer> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE VIDeo|RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:TYPE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <number> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <freq> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE EMI|SAN|OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA <freq>,<rel_ampl>{,<freq>,<rel_ampl>} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA:MERGe <freq>,<rel_ampl>{,<freq>,<rel_ampl>} . . . . . . . . . . . 277
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:X:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4[:STATe]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
[:SENSe]:DEMod AM|FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
[:SENSe]:DEMod:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
[:SENSe]:DEMod:STATe?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME <time>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
[:SENSe]:DETector:RANGe:IMMediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
[:SENSe]:DETector:RANGe:IMMediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle|AVERage|RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]: EMI QPEak|AVERage|OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]:EMI?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]EMI:VIEW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage:DWELl<time> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage:DWELl? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage[STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:PPEak? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:PPEak[STATe]OFF|ON|0|1| . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:QPEak:DWELl<time> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:QPEak:DWELl? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:QPEak[STATe]OFF|ON|0|1| . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PCENter[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PCENter[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PEAKs:SGTMargin[:STATe]ON|OFF|1|0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN <freq>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis:AUTO? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
[:SENSe]:POWer:QPGain[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
[:SENSe]:POWer:QPGain[:STATe]ON|OFF|1|0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation <rel_ampl> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <ampl>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:DELay <time> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:DELay? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LENGth <time> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LENGth? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LEVel HIGH|LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LEVel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:POLarity NEGative|POSitive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:POLarity?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:PRESet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:TYPE LEVel|EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:TYPE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE[:STATe]?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands
Alphabetical Listing
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Programming Fundamentals
The purpose of this chapter is to serve as a reminder of SCPI (Standard Commands
for Programmable Instruments) fundamentals to those who have previous
experience in programming SCPI. This chapter is not intended to teach you
everything about the SCPI programming language.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
The SCPI Consortium or IEEE can provide detailed information on the subject of
SCPI programming. Refer to IEEE Standard 488.1-1987, IEEE Standard Digital
Interface for Programmable Instrumentation. New York, NY, 1987, or to IEEE
Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common
Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
Valid EMC Analyzer SCPI commands are used for examples in this chapter.
Topics included in this chapter are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
38
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Creating Valid Commands
Creating Valid Commands
Commands are not case sensitive and there are often many different ways of
writing a particular command. These are examples of valid commands for a given
command syntax:
Command Syntax
Sample Valid Commands
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]
<freq>
The following sample commands are all identical. They
will all cause the same result.
• :Sense:Band:Res 1700
• :BANDWIDTH:RESOLUTION 1.7e3
• :sens:band 1.7KHZ
• :SENS:band 1.7E3Hz
• :band 1.7kHz
• :bandwidth:RES 1.7e3Hz
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?
The last command below returns different results than
the commands above it. The number 3 in the command
causes this. See the command description for more
information.
• :CALC:MARK:Y?
• :calc:mark:y?
• :CALC:MARK2:Y?
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle
• DET:FUNC NEG
• :Sense:Detector:Function Sample
:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1
The sample commands below are identical.
• :INIT:CONT ON
• :init:continuous 1
Chapter 1
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Command Notation Syntax
Command Notation Syntax
A typical command is made up of key words set off by colons. The key words are
followed by parameters that can be followed by optional units.
Example: :TRIGger:SEQuence:VIDeo:LEVel 2.5V
The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. In the
documentation, upper case letters indicate the short form of the key word. The
upper and lower case letters, together, indicate the long form of the key word.
Either form may be used in the command.
Example: :Trig:Seq:Vid:Lev 2.5Vis the same as
trigger:sequence:video:level 2.5V.
NOTE
The command :TRIGG:Sequence:Video:Level 2.5Vis not valid because
:TRIGGis neither the long, nor the short form of the command.
40
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Special Characters in Commands
Special Characters in Commands
Special
Meaning
Example
Character
|
A vertical stroke between
Command:
parameters indicates
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
alternative choices. The effect NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle
of the command is different
The choices are neg, pos, and samp.
depending on which parameter
:SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion SAMPleis one possible
command choice.
is selected.
A vertical stroke between key
words indicates identical
effects exist for several key
words. Only one of these key
words is used at a time. The
command functions the same
for either key word.
Command:
[:SENSe]:CHPower:BANDwidth|BWIDth:INTegrati
on
Two identical commands are:
:SENSe:CHPower:BANDwidth:INTegration
:SENSe:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration
[ ]
Key words in square brackets
Command:
are optional when composing [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO
the command. These implied
The following commands are all valid and have identical
key words will be executed
effects:
even if they are omitted.
:bandwidth:auto
:bandwidth:resolution:auto
:sense:bandwidth:auto
< >
Angle brackets around a word, Command:
or words, indicates they are not :SENSe:FREQ <freq>
to be used literally in the
In this command example the word <freq> should be
command. They represent the
replaced by an actual frequency:
needed item.
:SENSe:FREQ 9.7 MHz
{ }
Parameters in braces can
optionally be used in the
command either not at all,
once, or several times.
Command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA:MERGe
<freq>,<rel_ampl>{,<freq>,<rel_ampl>}
A valid form of this command is:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CSET1:DATA:MERGe
740000,.94 1250000,.31 3320000,1.7
Chapter 1
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Parameters in Commands
Parameters in Commands
There are four basic types of parameters: boolean, key words, variables and
arbitrary block program data.
Boolean
The expression OFF|ON|0|1 is a two state boolean-type parameter. The numeric
value 0 is equivalent to OFF. Any numeric value other than 0 is equivalent to ON.
The numeric values of 0 or 1 are commonly used in the command instead of OFF
or ON, and queries of the parameter always return a numeric value of 0 or 1.
Key Word
The parameter key words that are allowed for a particular command are defined in
the command description and are separated with a vertical slash.
Units
Numerical variables may include units. The valid units for a command depends on
the variable type being used. See the following variable descriptions. If no units are
sent, the indicated default units will be used. Units can follow the numerical value
with, or without, a space.
Variable
A variable can be entered in exponential format as well as standard numeric
format. The appropriate variable range and its optional units are defined in the
command description.
In addition to these values, the following key words may also be used in commands
where they are applicable.
MINimum - sets the parameter to the smallest possible value.
MAXimum - sets the parameter to the largest possible value.
UP - increments the parameter.
DOWN- decrements the parameter.
Include the key word MINimum or MAXimum after the question mark in a query
in order to return the numeric value of the key word.
Example query: [:SENSE]:FREQuency:CENTer? MAXimum
Variable Parameters
<ampl>,
<rel_ampl>
The <ampl> (amplitude) parameter and the <rel_ampl> (relative
amplitude) parameter consist of a rational number followed by
optional units. Acceptable units for <ampl> include: V, mV, µV,
dBm, dBmV, dBµV, Watts, W. <rel_ampl> units are given in dB.
42
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Parameters in Commands
<angle>
An angle parameter is a rational number followed by optional
units. The default units are degrees. Acceptable units include:
DEG, RAD.
<file_name>
<freq>
A file name parameter is the name of your file including the full
path. The back slash that follows the drive colon (C:\), usually
used in computer paths, is not used in the SCPI command string.
A frequency parameter is a positive rational number followed by
optional units. The default unit is Hz. Acceptable units include:
Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz.
<integer>
<number>
There are no units associated with an integer parameter.
A number parameter is a member of the set of positive or
negative intriguers and including zero. Fractional numbers are
included in the number parameter. There are no units associated
with a number parameter.
<percent>
A percent parameter is a rational number between 0 and 100,
with no units.
<rel_power>
A relative power parameter is a positive rational number
followed by optional units. The default units are dB. Acceptable
units are dB only.
<string>
<time>
A string parameter includes a series of alpha numeric characters.
A time parameter is a rational number followed by optional
units. The default units are seconds. Acceptable units include: S,
MS, US.
Block Program Data
Definite length arbitrary block response data is defined in section 8.7.9.2 of IEEE
Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common
Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
<definite_length_block>
Allows data to be transmitted over the system
interface as a series of 8 bit data bytes. This
element is particularly useful for sending
large quantities of data, 8 bit extended ASCII
codes, or other data that are not able to be
directly displayed.
A definite length block of data starts with an
ASCII header that begins with # and indicates
how many additional data points are
following in the block. For example, if the
header is #512320, then interpret the header
as follows:
•
The first digit in the header (5) represents
how many additional digits/bytes there are
in the header.
Chapter 1
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Parameters in Commands
•
•
The numbers 12320 indicates 12
thousand, 3 hundred, 20 data bytes follow
the header.
To determine how may points in the
block, divide 12320 by your selected data
format bytes/point. Divide by 8 for real
64, or 4 for real 32. In this example there
are 1540 points in the block if your
selected data format is real 64.
44
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Improving Measurement Speed
Improving Measurement Speed
There are a number of things you can do in your programs to make them run faster:
Turn off the display updates
:DISPlay:ENABle OFFturns off the display. Updating the display slows down
the measurement. For remote testing, since the computer is processing the data
rather than a person, there is no need to display the data on the analyzer screen.
Disable auto alignment
:CALibration:AUTO OFFdisables the automatic alignment process of the
instrument. Automatic alignment processing occurs at the end of each sweep. In a
stable operating environment, automatic alignment consumes very little instrument
resources. However, in a high throughput application, any demand upon
instrument resources affects measurement update rate.
NOTE
When auto alignment is off, the Align Now, All function should be performed
periodically. Refer to the appropriate “Specifications and Characteristics” chapter
in the Agilent Technologies EMC Analyzers Specifications Guide for more
information on how often to perform Align Now, All when the auto alignment is
off.
Use a fixed IF Gain range
In applications where narrow resolution bandwidths (< 1 kHz) are required and a
high dynamic range is not required,
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[SCALe]:LOG:RANGe:AUTO OFFdisables auto
ranging and results in increased measurement update rate.
Disable the IF/Video/Sweep output ports
If the analyzer has Options A4J (IF, Video and Sweep Ports) or AYX (Fast Time
Domain Sweeps), various output signals with rear-panel ports are controlled by
instrument processing. If these ports are not used in a particular application,
:SYSTem:PORTs:IFVSweep:ENABle OFFcan be used to disable the ports and
conserve instrument resources.
Chapter 1
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Improving Measurement Speed
Select phase noise performance
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis can be used to optimize either phase noise
performance or tuning speed. In some settings optimizing for tuning speed reduces
sweep time and the “re-tune” time between sweeps. In other settings only the
re-tune time is improved.
Use binary data format instead of ASCII
The ASCII data format is the instrument default since it is easier for people to
understand and is required by SCPI for *RST. However, data input/output is faster
using the binary formats.
:FORMat:DATA REAL,64selects the 64-bit binary data format for all your
numerical data queries. You may need to swap the byte order if you are using a PC
rather than UNIX. NORMalis the default byte order. Use :FORMat:BORDer
SWAPto change the byte order so that the least significant byte is sent first.
When using the binary format, data is sent in a block of bytes with an ASCII header.
A data query would return the block of data in the following format: #DNNN<nnn
binary data bytes>
To parse the data:
•
Read two characters (#D), where D tells you how many N characters follow the
D character.
•
•
Read D characters, the resulting integer specifies the number of data bytes sent.
Read the bytes into a real array.
For example, suppose the header is #512320.
•
The first character/digit in the header (5) tells you how many additional digits
there are in the header.
•
•
The 12320 means 12 thousand, 3 hundred, 20 data bytes follow the header.
Divide this number of bytes by your current data format (bytes/data point),
8 for real, 64. For this example, there are 1540 data points in the block of data.
Minimize the number of GPIB transactions.
When you are using the GPIB for control of your instrument, each transaction
requires driver overhead and bus handshaking, so minimizing these transactions
reduces the time used.
You can reduce bus transactions by sending multiple commands per transaction.
See the information on “Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line” in the
SCPI Language Basics section.
If you are using the pre-configured MEASURE key measurements and are making
the same measurement multiple times with small changes in the measurement
setup, use the single READ command. It is faster then using INITiate and FETCh.
46
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Improving Measurement Speed
Avoid unnecessary use of *RST.
Remember that *RST presets all the measurements and settings to their factory
defaults and my also change the mode. This forces you to reset the measurement
settings of the analyzer even if they use similar mode setup or measurement
Minimize DUT/instrument setup changes.
•
•
•
Some instrument setup parameters are common to multiple measurements. You
should look at your measurement process with a focus on minimizing setup
changes. If your test process involves nested loops, make sure that the
inner-most loop is the fastest. Also, check if the loops could be nested in a
different order to reduce the number of parameter changes as you step through
the test.
Are you are using the pre-configured Measurements (MEASURE key)?
Remember that if you have already set your Meas Setup parameters for a
measurement, and you want to make another one of these measurements later,
use READ:<meas>?. The MEASure:<meas>?. command resets all the settings
to the defaults, while READ changes back to that measurement without
changing the setup parameters from the previous use.
Are you are using the pre-configured Measurements (MEASURE key)? Also
remember that Mode Setup parameters remain constant across all the
measurements (such as: center/channel frequency, amplitude, radio standard,
input selection, trigger setup). You don’t have to re-initialize them each time
you change to a different measurement.
Chapter 1
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line
Multiple commands can be written on the same line, reducing your code space
requirement. To do this:
•
•
Commands must be separated with a semicolon (;).
If the commands are in different subsystems, the key word for the new
subsystem must be preceded by a colon (:).
•
If the commands are in the same subsystem, the full hierarchy of the command
key words need not be included. The second command can start at the same key
word level as the command that was just executed.
SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax
A terminator must be provided when an instrument is controlled using RS-232
(Option 1AX). There are several issues to be understood about choosing the proper
SCPI terminator and separator when this is the case. There is no current SCPI
standard for RS-232. Although one intent of SCPI is to be interface independent,
<END> is only defined for IEEE 488 operation. At the time of this writing, the
RS-232 terminator issue was in the process of being addressed in IEEE standard
1174.
A semicolon (;) is not a SCPI terminator, it is a separator. The purpose of the
separator is to queue multiple commands or queries in order to obtain multiple
actions and/or responses. Make sure that you do not attempt to use the semicolon
as a terminator when using RS-232 control.
Basically all binary trace and response data is terminated with <NL><END>, as
defined in Section 8.5 of IEEE Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes,
Formats, Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std
488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
The following are some examples of good and bad commands. The examples are
created from an EMC analyzer with the simple set of commands indicated below:
[:SENSe]
:POWer
[:RF]
:ATTenuation 40dB
[:SENSe]
:FREQuency
:STARt
:POWer
[:RF]
:MIXer
:RANGe
[:UPPer]
48
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line
:TRIGger
[:SEQuence]
:EXTernal [1]
:SLOPe
POSitive
Bad Command
Good Command
PWR:ATT 40dB
The short form of POWERis POW, not PWR.
POW:ATT 40dB
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;MIX:RANG –20dBm FREQ:STAR 30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG
–20dBm
The :MIX:RANGcommand is in the same :SENSEsubsystem as :FREQ, but executing
the :FREQcommand puts you back at the :SENSElevel. You must specify :POWto
get to the :MIX:RANGcommand.
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;POW:MIX RANG
–20dBm
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG
–20dBm
:MIXand :RANGrequire a colon to separate them.
:POW:ATT 40dB;TRIG:FREQ:STAR
2.3GHz
:POW:ATT 40dB;:FREQ:STAR
2.3GHz
:FREQ:STARis in the :SENSEsubsystem, not the :TRIGGERsubsystem.
:POW:ATT?:FREQ:STAR? :POW:ATT?;:FREQ:STAR?
:POWand :FREQare within the same :SENSEsubsystem, but they are two separate
commands, so they should be separated with a semicolon, not a colon.
:POW:ATT -5dB;:FREQ:STAR 10MHz :POW:ATT 5dB;:FREQ:STAR 10MHz
Attenuation cannot be a negative value.
Chapter 1
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Overview of GPIB (Option A4H)
Overview of GPIB (Option A4H)
GPIB Instrument Nomenclature
An instrument that is part of a GPIB network is categorized as a listener, talker, or
controller, depending on its current function in the network.
Listener
A listener is a device capable of receiving data or commands
from other instruments. Any number of instruments in the GPIB
network can be listeners simultaneously.
Talker
A talker is a device capable of transmitting data or commands to
other instruments. To avoid confusion, an GPIB system allows
only one device at a time to be an active talker.
Controller
A controller is an instrument, typically a computer, capable of
managing the various GPIB activities. Only one device at a time
can be an active controller.
GPIB Command Statements
Command statements form the nucleus of GPIB programming. They are
understood by all instruments in the network. When combined with the
programming language codes, they provide all management and data
communication instructions for the system. Refer to the your programming
language manual and your computers I/O programming manual for more
information.
The seven fundamental command functions are as follows:
•
An abort function that stops all listener/talker activity on the interface bus, and
prepares all instruments to receive a new command from the controller.
Typically, this is an initialization command used to place the bus in a known
starting condition (sometimes called: abort, abortio, reset, halt).
•
•
A remote function that causes an instrument to change from local control to
remote control. In remote control, the front panel keys are disabled except for
the Local key and the line power switch (sometimes called: remote, resume).
A local lockout function, that can be used with the remote function, to disable
the front panel Local key. With the Local key disabled, only the controller (or a
hard reset by the line power switch) can restore local control (sometimes called:
local).
50
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Overview of GPIB (Option A4H)
•
•
A local function that is the complement to the remote command, causing an
instrument to return to local control with a fully enabled front panel (sometimes
called: local, resume).
A clear function that causes all GPIB instruments, or addressed instruments, to
assume a cleared condition. The definition of clear is unique for each
instrument (sometimes called: clear, reset, control, send).
In the Agilent EMC Analyzer, clear does the following:
1. Clears the Input Buffer and the Output Queue.
2. Resets the parser.
3. Clears any current operations, such as *OPC, i.e., returns the device to
Operation Complete Query Idle State and Operation Complete Command
Idle State.
4. Aborts /resumes the current sweep.
•
•
An output function that is used to send function commands and data commands
from the controller to the addressed instrument (sometimes called: output,
control, convert, image, iobuffer, transfer).
An enter function that is the complement of the output function and is used to
transfer data from the addressed instrument to the controller (sometimes called:
enter, convert, image, iobuffer, on timeout, set timeout, transfer).
Chapter 1
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Overview of RS-232 (Option 1AX)
Overview of RS-232 (Option 1AX)
Serial interface programming techniques are similar to most general I/O
applications. Due to the asynchronous nature of serial I/O operations, special care
must be exercised to ensure that data is not lost by sending to another device before
the device is ready to receive. Modem line handshaking can he used to help solve
this problem. These and other topics are discussed in greater detail in your
programming language documentation.
Settings for the Serial Interface
Please refer to the documentation on your computer and I/O to configure the serial
interface. Some common serial interface configuration settings are:
Baud Rate to
Bits per character to
Parity to
9600
8
Odd or disabled
1
Stop bits to
Handshake and Baud Rate
To determine hardware operating parameters, you need to know the answer for
each of the following questions about the peripheral device:
•
Which of the following signal and control lines are actively used during
communication with the peripheral?
— Data Set Ready (DSR)
— Clear to Send (CTS)
•
What baud rate is expected by the peripheral?
Character Format Parameters
To define the character format, you must know the requirements of the peripheral
device for the following parameters:
•
Character Length: Eight data bits are used for each character, excluding start,
stop, and parity bits.
•
•
Parity Enable: Parity is disabled (absent) for each character.
Stop Bits: One stop bit is included with each character.
52
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Overview of RS-232 (Option 1AX)
Modem Line Handshaking
To use modem line handshaking for data transfer you would consider the following
tasks:
1. Set Data Terminal Ready and Request-to-Send modem lines to active state.
2. Check Data Set Ready and Clear-to-Send modem lines to be sure they are
active.
3. Send information to the interface and thence to the peripheral.
4. After data transfer is complete, clear Data Terminal Ready and
Request-to-Send signals.
For ENTER operations:
1. Set Data Terminal Ready line to active state. Leave Request-to-Send inactive.
2. Check Data Set Ready and Data Carrier Detect modem lines to be sure they are
active.
3. Input information from the interface as it is received from the peripheral.
4. After the input operation is complete, clear the Data Terminal Ready signal.
Data Transfer Errors
The serial interface can generate several types of errors when certain conditions are
encountered while receiving data from the peripheral device. Errors can be
generated by any of the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
Parity error. The parity bit on an incoming character does not match the parity
expected by the receiver. This condition is most commonly caused by line
noise.
Framing error. Start and stop bits do not match the timing expectations of the
receiver. This can occur when line noise causes the receiver to miss the start bit
or obscures the stop bits.
Overrun error. Incoming data buffer overrun caused a loss of one or more data
characters. This is usually caused when data is received by the interface, but no
ENTER statement has been activated to input the information.
Break received. A BREAK was sent to the interface by the peripheral device.
The desktop computer program must be able to properly interpret the meaning
of a break and take appropriate action.
Chapter 1
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Printer Setup and Operation
Printer Setup and Operation
Equipment
•
Agilent EMC Analyzer equipped with standard I/O Option A4H (GPIB) and
(Parallel Interface) or Option 1AX (RS-232 and Parallel Interface).
•
•
IEEE 1284 compliant printer cable (such as HP C2950A).
Supported printer equipped with a parallel interface. (A supported printer is one
that accepts Printer Control Language Level 3 or 5).
— PCL3 printers include most HP DeskJet printers.
— PCL5 printers include most HP LaserJet printers and the 1600C DeskJet
printer.
Interconnection and Setup
1. Turn off the printer and the analyzer.
2. Connect the printer to the analyzer parallel I/O interface connector using an
IEEE 1284 compliant parallel printer cable.
3. If appropriate, configure your printer using configuration menus or switches.
Refer to your printer’s documentation for more specific information on
configuring your printer.
4. Turn on the analyzer and printer.
5. Press Print Setup on the front panel and then press the Printer Type menu key.
Printer Type accesses the following keys:
None
None disables the analyzer from attempting to print to a
printer. This is the appropriate setting if no printer is
connected to the analyzer.
Custom
Custom allows you to access the Define Custom menu
keys. The Define Custom menu keys allow you to specify
printer characteristics such as PCL Level and printer color
capability.
Auto
Auto enables the analyzer to automatically attempt to
identify the connected printer when the Print key is pressed
or when Printer Type is set to Auto.
54
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Printer Setup and Operation
6. Press Printer Type to access the Printer Type menu keys. Press Auto to make
the analyzer attempt to identify the connected printer. When you press Auto,
the analyzer will respond in one of the three following ways:
•
The Print Setup menu will be displayed with the Auto key selected and no
new message will be displayed in the display status line. This indicates that
the analyzer has successfully identified the connected printer and no further
setup is required. As long as Auto remains selected in the Printer Type
menu, the analyzer will attempt to identify the printer when the front panel
Print key is pressed.
•
The Print Setup menu will be displayed with the Custom key selected and
one of the following diagnostic messages will be displayed in the display
status line:
Unknown printer, Define Custom to set up printer
No printer response, Define Custom to set up
printer
Invalid printer response, Define Custom to set up
printer
This indicates that the analyzer was unable to automatically identify the
connected printer, and Custom has been selected in the Printer Type menu.
Press Print Setup, Define Custom to select specific printer characteristics
such as the printer language (PCL3 or PCL5) and color printing capability.
Once you have set these characteristics to match those of your connected
printer, the printer setup process is complete. As long as Custom remains
selected in the Printer Type menu, the analyzer will not attempt to
automatically identify the connected printer when the front panel Print key
is pressed.
•
The Print Setup menu will be displayed with the None key selected and the
following message will appear in the display status line:
Unsupported printer, Printer Type set to None
This indicates that the analyzer has successfully identified the connected
printer, but the printer is not supported by the analyzer. As long as None is
selected in the Printer Type menu, the analyzer will respond to any print
command by displaying the message Printer Type is Nonein the
display status line.
Chapter 1
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Fundamentals
Printer Setup and Operation
Testing Printer Operation
When you have completed the printer setup for the analyzer, press Print Setup,
Print (Screen), and then press Print on the front panel. If the printer is ready and
the printer setup was successful, a printout of the analyzer display will be printed.
If the printer is not ready, the message Printer Timeoutwill appear on the
analyzer display. Printer Timeoutwill remain on the display until the printer
is ready or until you press ESC to cancel the printout request.
56
Chapter1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Status Registers
This chapter contains a comprehensive description of status registers explaining
what status registers are and how to use them. Information pertaining to all bits of
the registers in Agilent EMC analyzers is also provided.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of
Analyzer Events and Conditions
Programs often need to detect and manage error conditions or changes in analyzer
status. Agilent EMC products allow this function to be performed using status
registers. You can determine the state of certain analyzer hardware and firmware
events and conditions by programming the status register system.
in a hierarchical order. The service request enable register is at the top of the
hierarchy and contains the general status information for the analyzer events and
conditions. The lower-priority status registers propagate their data to the
higher-priority registers in the data structures by means of summary bits. These
registers are used to determine the states of specific events or conditions.
Figure 2-1
Status Register System Simplified Block Diagram
The two methods used to programmatically access the information in status
registers are the polling method and the service request method. An explanation of
58
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
What are the Status Registers?
status registers are composed of the five individual registers described below. One
such status register in the figure is entitled “STATus: QUEStionable,” which is
both the name of the register, and the SCPI command form used to access the
register. From now on, the SCPI command form will be used when referring to the
various registers. There are IEEE common SCPI commands noted under some
register names in parenthesis. These commands are associated with those registers,
guide.
Refer to the right-hand part of the STATus: QUEStionable register while reading
the following register descriptions.
Condition
Register
A condition register continuously monitors the hardware and
firmware status of the analyzer. There is no latching or buffering
for a condition register.
Negative
Transition
Filter
A negative transition filter specifies the bits in the condition
register that will set corresponding bits in the event register
when the condition bit changes from
1 to 0.
Positive
Transition
Filter
A positive transition filter specifies the bits in the condition
register that will set corresponding bits in the event register
when the condition bit changes from
0 to 1.
Event
Register
An event register latches transition events from the condition
register as specified by the positive and negative transition
filters. Bits in the event register are latched, and once set, they
remain set until cleared by either querying the register contents
or sending the *CLScommand.
Event
Enable
Register
An event enable register specifies the bits in the event register
that can generate a summary bit. Summary bits are, in turn, used
by the status byte register.
Chapter 2
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Status registers (except for the status byte register and the standard event status
register) consist of the registers whose contents can be used to produce status
summary bits.
These summary bits are then manipulated as follows: The condition register passes
summary bits to the negative and positive transition filters, after which they are
stored in the event register. The contents of the event register are logically ANDed
with the contents of the event enable register and the result is logically ORed to
produce a status summary bit. The status summary bit is then passed to the status
byte register either directly, or through the STATus: QUEStionable register. Next,
the summary bits are logically ANDed with the contents of the service request
enable register and the result is logically ORed to produce the request service
(*RQS) bit in the status byte register.
How Do You Access the Status Registers?
There are two different methods to access the status registers:
•
•
Common Commands Accesses and Controls
Status Subsystem Commands
Common Command Access and Control
Most monitoring of the analyzer conditions is done at the highest level using the
following IEEE common commands:
*CLS(clear status) clears the status byte by emptying the error queue and
clearing all the event registers.
*ESE,*ESE?(event status enable) sets and queries the bits in the enable
register part of the standard event status register.
*ESR?(event status register) queries and clears the standard event status
register.
*OPC(operation complete) sets bit 0 in the standard event status register when
all operations are complete.
*SRE,*SRE?(service request enable) sets and queries the value of the service
request enable register.
*STB?(status byte) queries the value of the status byte register without erasing
its contents.
Chapter 2
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
NOTE
If you are using the status bits and the analyzer mode is changed, the status bits
should be read, and any error conditions resolved, prior to switching modes. Error
conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the
condition registers after the mode change. This is true unless they recur after the
mode change, although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the
event registers.
Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their
power-on defaults. Hence any event or condition register masks must be
re-established after a mode change. Also note that the power up status bit is set by
any mode change, since that is the default state after power up.
Status Subsystem Commands
Individual status registers can be set and queried using the commands in the
two methods used to programmatically detect and manage error conditions or
changes in analyzer status. Either method allows you to monitor one or more
conditions. The two methods are:
•
•
The Polling Method
The Service Request (SRQ) Method
The Polling Method
In the polling method, the analyzer has a passive role. It only tells the controller
that conditions have changed when the controller asks the right question. The
polling method works well if you do not need to know about changes the moment
they occur. This method is very efficient.
Use the polling method when either:
— your programming language/development environment does not support SRQ
interrupts
— you want to write a simple, single-purpose program and don’t want the added
complexity of setting up an SRQ handler
The Service Request (SRQ) Method
The SRQ method allows timely communication of information without requiring
continuous controller involvement. Using this method, the analyzer takes a more
active role. It tells the controller when there has been a condition change without
the controller asking. The SRQ method should be used if you must know
immediately when a condition changes. This is in contrast to the polling method,
which requires the program to repeatedly read the registers to detect a change.
62
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Use the SRQ method when either:
— you need time-critical notification of changes
— you are monitoring more than one device which supports SRQs
— you need to have the controller do something else while the analyzer is making
a measurement
— you can’t afford the performance penalty inherent to polling
Using the Service Request (SRQ) Method
Your language, bus, and programming environment must be able to support SRQ
interrupts (for example, using C and C++ with the GPIB). When you monitor a
condition with the SRQ method, you must establish the following parameters:
1. Determine which bit monitors the condition.
2. Determine how that bit reports to the request service (RQS) bit of the status
byte.
3. Send GPIB commands to enable the bits that monitor the condition and to
enable the summary bits that report the condition to the RQS bit.
4. Enable the controller to respond to service requests.
When the condition changes, the analyzer sets the RQS bit and the GPIB SRQ line.
The controller is informed of the change as soon as it occurs. The time the
controller would otherwise have used to monitor the condition can now be used to
perform other tasks. Your program also determines how the controller responds to
the SRQ.
Generating a Service Request
Before using the SRQ method of generating a service request, first become
familiar with how service requests are generated. Bit 6 of the status byte register is
the request service summary (RQS) bit. The RQS bit is set whenever there is a
change in the register bit that it has been configured to monitor. The RQS bit will
remain set until the condition that caused it is cleared. It can be queried without
erasing the contents using the *STB?command. Configure the RQS function using
the *SREcommand.
When a register set causes a summary bit in the status byte to change from 0 to 1,
the analyzer can initiate the service request (SRQ) process. However, the process is
only initiated if both of the following conditions are true:
•
•
The corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1.
The analyzer does not have a service request pending. (A service request is
considered to be pending between the time the analyzer SRQ process is
initiated, and the time the controller reads the status byte register.)
The SRQ process sets the GPIB SRQ line true. It also sets the status byte request
service (RQS) bit to 1. Both actions are necessary to inform the controller that the
analyzer requires service. Setting the SRQ line only informs the controller that
some device on the bus requires service. Setting the RQS bit allows the controller
to determine which device requires service.
Chapter 2
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
If your program enables the controller to detect and respond to service requests, it
should instruct the controller to perform a serial poll when the GPIB SRQ line is
set true. Each device on the bus returns the contents of its status byte register in
response to this poll. The device, whose RQS bit is set to 1, is the device that
requested service.
NOTE
When you read the analyzer status byte register with a serial poll, the RQS bit is
reset to 0. Other bits in the register are not affected.
Restarting a measurement with the :INITiatecommand can cause the
measuring bit to pulse low. A low pulse causes an SRQ if the status register is
configured to SRQ upon end-of-measurement. To avoid this, perform the
following steps:
1. Set :INITiate:CONTinuousoff.
2. Set/enable the status registers.
3. Restart the measurement (send :INITiate).
Example of Monitoring Conditions Using the :STATus Command
Use the following steps to monitor a specific condition:
1. Determine which register contains the bit that reports the condition.
2. Send the unique SCPI query that reads that register.
3. Examine the bit to see if the condition has changed.
4. Act upon the cause of the condition and the SRQ to re-enable the method.
The examples below show how to use the :STATuscommand to perform the
following tasks:
•
Check the analyzer hardware and firmware status.
Do this by querying the condition registers which continuously monitor status.
These registers represent the current state of the analyzer. Bits in a condition
register are updated in real time. When the condition monitored by a particular
bit becomes true, the bit is set to 1. When the condition becomes false, the bit is
reset to 0.
•
Monitor a particular bit (condition), or bits.
Once you have enabled a bit using the event enable register, the analyzer will
monitor that particular bit. If the bit becomes true in the event register it will
stay set until the event register is cleared. Querying the event register allows
you to detect that this condition occurred even if the condition no longer exists.
The event register can only be cleared by querying it or sending the *CLS
command, which clears all event registers.
•
Monitor a change in the condition of a particular bit, or bits.
Once you have enabled a bit, the analyzer will monitor it for a change in its
condition. The transition registers are preset to respond to the condition of
going from 0 to 1 (positive transitions). This can be changed so that the selected
bit is detected if it goes from 1 to 0 (negative transition), or if either transition
occurs. Query the event register to determine whether or not a change has been
made to how the transition registers respond. The event register can only be
cleared by querying it or sending the *CLScommand, which clears all event
registers.
64
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Setting and Querying the Status Register
its location. This number is sent with the command to enable a particular bit. To
enable more than one bit, send the sum of all of the bits involved.
For example, to enable bit 0 and bit 6 of the standard event status register, you
would send the command *ESE 65(1 + 64).
The results of a query are evaluated in a similar way. If the *STB?command
returns a decimal value of 140, (140 = 128 + 8 + 4) then bit 7 is true, bit 3 is true,
and bit 2 is true.
Figure 2-3
Status Register Bit Values
Bit Number
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
1 0
5 4 3 2
7
6
ck730a
Details of Bits in All Registers
the figure, along with descriptions of their purpose.
Chapter 2
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Status Byte Register
Figure 2-4
Status Byte Register Diagram
Status Byte Register
Unused
0
Unused
1
Error/Event Queue Summary Bit
2
Questionable Status Summary Bit
3
Message Available (MAV)
4
Standard Event Summary Bit
5
Request Service Summary (RQS)
6
Operation Status Summary Bit
7
&
&
&
&
+
&
&
&
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Service Request Enable Register
ck763a
The status byte register contains the following bits:
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
0
1
2
1
2
4
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Error/Event Queue Summery Bit: A 1 in this bit position
indicates that the SCPI error queue is not empty. The SCPI error
queue contains at least one error message.
3
4
8
Questionable Status Summary Bit: A 1 in this bit
position indicates that the questionable status summary bit has
been set. The questionable status event register can then be read
to determine the specific condition that caused this bit to be set.
16
Message Available (MAV): A 1 in this bit position
indicates that the analyzer has data ready in the output queue.
There are no lower status groups that provide input to this bit.
66
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
5
32
Standard Event Status Summary Bit: A 1 in this bit
position indicates that the standard event status summary bit has
been set. The standard event status register can then be read to
determine the specific event that caused this bit to be set.
6
7
64
Request Service (RQS) Summery Bit: A 1 in this bit
position indicates that the analyzer has at least one reason to
report a status change. This bit is also called the master summary
status bit (MSS).
128
Operation Status Summary Bit: A 1 in this bit position
indicates that the operation status summary bit has been set. The
operation status event register can then be read to determine the
specific event that caused this bit to be set.
To query the status byte register, send the *STBcommand. The response will be
the decimal sum of the bits that are set to 1. For example, if bit number 7 and bit
number 3 are set to 1, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8. So the decimal
value 136 is returned.
Service Request Enable Register
In addition to the status byte register, the status byte group also contains the service
request enable register. The status byte service request enable register lets you
choose which bits in the Status Byte Register will trigger a service request.
Send the *SRE <number>command (where <number>is the sum of the decimal
values of the bits you want to enable plus the decimal value of bit 6). For example,
assume that you want to enable bit 7 so that whenever the operation status
summary bit is set to 1, it will trigger a service request. Send the *SRE 192(128 +
64) command. The *SRE?command returns the decimal value of the sum of the
bits enabled previously with the *SRE <number>command.
NOTE
You must always add 64 (the numeric value of RQS bit 6) to your numeric sum
when you enable any bits for a service request.
The service request enable register contains the following bits:
Chapter 2
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Figure 2-5
Service Request Enable Register
NOTE
The service request enable register presets to zeros (0).
Standard Event Status Register
The standard event status register is used to determine the specific event that sets
bit 5 in the status byte register. The standard event status register does not have
negative and positive transition registers, nor a condition register. Use the IEEE
guide to access the register.
To query the standard event status register, send the *ESRcommand. The response
will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1. For example, if bit number 7
and bit number 3 are set to 1, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8. So the
decimal value 136 is returned.
information.
68
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Figure 2-6
Standard Event Status Register Diagram
Operation Complete
Request Bus Control
Query Error
Device Dependent Error
Execution Error
Command Error
User Request
Power On
Event Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
&
&
&
&
&
+
&
&
&
Event
Enable Register
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
To Status Byte Register Bit #5
ck723a
The standard event status register contains the following bits:
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
0
1
Operation Complete: A 1 in this bit position indicates that all
operations were completed following execution of the *OPC
command.
1
2
2
4
Request Bus Control: This bit is always set to 0. (The
analyzer does not request control.)
Query Error: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a query error
has occurred. Query errors have SCPI error numbers from −499 to
–400.
3
4
8
Device Dependent Error: A 1 in this bit position indicates
that a device dependent error has occurred. Device dependent
errors have SCPI error numbers from –399 to –300 and 1 to
32767.
16
Execution Error: A 1 in this bit position indicates that an
execution error has occurred. Execution errors have SCPI error
numbers from –299 to –200.
Chapter 2
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
5
32
Command Error: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a
command error has occurred. Command errors have SCPI error
numbers from –199 to –100.
6
7
64
User Request Key (Local: A 1 in this bit position indicates
that the LOCAL key has been pressed. This is true even if the
analyzer is in local lockout mode.
128
Power On: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the analyzer has
been turned off and then on.
Standard Event Status Event Enable Register
The event enable register (contained in the standard event status register) lets you
choose which bits will set the summary bit (bit 5 of the status byte register) to 1.
Send the *ESE <number>command (where <number>is the sum of the decimal
values of the bits you want to enable).
For example, to enable bit 7 and bit 6 so that whenever either of those bits is set to
1, the standard event status summary bit of the status byte register will also be set
to 1, send the *ESE 192(128 + 64) command. The *ESE?command returns the
decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the *ESE <number>
command.
Figure 2-7
Standard Event Status Event Enable Register
STATus:OPERation Register
The STATus:OPERation register is used to determine the specific event that sets
bit 7 in the status byte register. This register also monitors the current measurement
state and checks to see if the analyzer is performing any of these functions:
•
•
measuring
calibrating
70
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
The STATus:OPERation condition register contains the following bits:
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
0
1
2
3
0
Calibrating: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the
analyzer is performing a self-calibration.
2
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
4
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
8
Sweeping: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a sweep is
in progress.
a
16
Measuring: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a
measurement is in progress.
4
32
Waiting for Trigger: A 1 in this bit position indicates
that a measurement is in a “wait for trigger” state.
5
6
64
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
7
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
8
Paused: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument
is in the paused state of the measurement.
9
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Always Zero (0)
a. The description of this bit refers to any measurement under the MEASURE key.
72
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
STATus:OPERation Condition and Event Enable Registers
The STATus:OPERation condition register continuously monitors the hardware
and firmware status of the analyzer, and is read-only. To query the register, send
the :STATus:OPERation:CONDition?command. The response will be the
decimal sum of the bits that are set to 1. For example, if bit number 9 and bit
number 3 are set to 1, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 512 plus 8. So the decimal
value 520 is returned.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition
register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be
positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to 0). Send the
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <num>(negative transition) command
or the :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <num>(positive transition)
command (where <num>is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to
enable).
The STATus:OPERation event register latches transition events from the condition
register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are destructive
read-only data. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that
register. To query the event register, send the
:STATus:OPERation:[:EVENt]?command.
The STATus:OPERation event enable register lets you choose the bits that will set
the operation status summary bit (bit 7) of the status byte register to 1. Send the
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle <num>command where <num>is the sum of
the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
For example, to enable bit 9 and bit 3 (so that whenever either bit 9 or 3 is set to 1,
the operation status summary bit of the status byte register will be set to 1), send
the :STATus:OPERation:ENABle 520(512 + 8) command. The
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle?command returns the decimal value of the
sum of the bits previously enabled with the :STATus:OPERation:ENABle
<num>command.
STATus:QUEStionable Registers
STATus:QUEStionable registers monitor the overall analyzer condition. They are
accessed with the :STATus:OPERationand :STATus:QUEStionable
commands in the :STATuscommand subsystem.
The STATus:QUEStionable registers also monitor the analyzer to see if there are
any questionable events that occurred. These registers look for anything that may
cause an error or that may induce a faulty measurement. Signs of a faulty
measurement include the following:
•
•
•
hardware problems
out of calibration situations
unusual signals
Chapter 2
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
NOTE
All bits are summary bits from lower-level event registers. (For a general diagram
A Questionable Status condition register query response will be the decimal sum
of the bits which are set to 1. For example, if bit number 9 and bit number 3 are set
to 1, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 512 plus 8. So the decimal value 520 is
returned.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition
register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be
positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to 0). Send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <num>(negative transition) or
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <num>(positive transition) where
<num>is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status event register latches transition events from the condition
register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are destructive
read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that
register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
74
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Figure 2-9
Status Questionable Register Diagram
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
POWer Summary
Reserved
FREQuency Summary
Reserved
Reserved
CALibration Summary
INTregrity Sum
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Always Zero (0)
QUEStionable Status
Condition Register
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
QUEStionable Status
Positive
Transition Filter
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
QUEStionable Status
Negative
Transition Filter
QUEStionable Status
Event Register
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
+
QUEStionable Status
Event
Enable Register
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To Status Byte Register Bit #3
ck759a
Chapter 2
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Power Condition Register are given in
the following table.
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
0
0
R.P.P Tripped: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the
reverse power protection is tripped (Agilent model E7401A
only). Reverse power protection is “overload” protection for
the tracking generator.
1
2
2
4
Source Unleveled: A 1 in this bit position indicates that
the source (tracking generator) output is unleveled.
Source LO Unleveled: A 1 in this bit position indicates
that the local oscillator (LO) in the source (tracking generator)
is unleveled.
3
4
5
6
8
LO Unleveled: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the
analyzer local oscillator (LO) is unleveled.
16
32
64
50 MHz Osc Unleveled: A 1 in this bit position indicates
that the 50 MHz amplitude reference signal is unleveled.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
Input Overload Tripped: A 1 in this bit position
indicates that the input overload protection is tripped (Agilent
EMC model E7401A only).
7
8
128
256
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
LO Out Unleveled: A 1 in this bit position indicates that
the first local oscillator (LO) output is unleveled.
9
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Always Zero (0): This bit is always set to 0.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Questionable Status Event Enable Register
The Questionable Status Event Enable Register lets you choose which bits in the
Questionable Status Event Register will set the summary bit (bit 3 of the Status
Byte Register) to 1. Send the command :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle
<num>where <num>is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to
enable.
Chapter 2
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
For example, to enable bit 9 and bit 3 so that whenever either of those bits is set to
1, the Questionable Status Summary bit of the Status Byte Register will be set to 1,
send the command :STAT:QUES:ENAB 520(512 + 8). The command
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?returns the decimal value of the sum of
the bits previously enabled with the :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <num>
command.
Figure 2-11
Questionable Status Event Enable Register
Bit descriptions in the Status Questionable Condition Register are given in the
following table.
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
4
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
8
POWer Summary: This is the summary bit for the
Questionable Power Status Register.
16
32
64
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
FREQuency Summary: This is the summary bit for the
Questionable Frequency Status Register.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
78
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
7
128
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
8
256
CALibration Summary: This is the summary bit for the
Questionable Calibration Status Register.
9
512
INTegrity Sum: This is the summary bit for the
Questionable Integrity Status Register.
10
11
12
13
14
15
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Always Zero (0)
Questionable Status Power Condition and Event Registers
The Questionable Status Power Condition Register continuously monitors output
power status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only. To query the
condition register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?The response will be the
decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition
register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be
positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to 0). Send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <num>(negative
transition) or :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <num>
(positive transition) where <num>is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you
want to enable.
The Questionable Status Power Event Register latches transition events from the
condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are
destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of
that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
how to set the summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the
command :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <num>.
Chapter 2
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register
Figure 2-12
Questionable Status Frequency Register Diagram
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Frequency Condition Register are given
in the following table.
80
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
0
0
Source Synth Unlocked: A 1 in this bit position indicates
that the synthesizer in the source (tracking generator) is
unlocked.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
4
Freq Ref Unlocked: A 1 in this bit position indicates that
the analyzer frequency reference is unlocked.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
8
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
16
32
64
128
256
512
Synth Unlocked: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the
analyzer synthesizer is unlocked.
Invalid Span or BW: A 1 in this bit position indicates
an invalid span or bandwidth during frequency count.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Demodulation: A 1 in this bit position indicates an invalid
span during FM Demodulation and Listen measurements.
10
11
12
13
14
15
1024
2048
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Always Zero (0): This bit is always set to 0.
4096
8192
16384
32768
Chapter 2
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Questionable Status Frequency Condition and
Event Enable Registers
The Questionable Status Frequency condition register continuously monitors
output frequency status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only. To query
the condition register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?The response will be
the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
The negative and positive transition filters specify which types of bit state changes
in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The
changes may be positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to 0). Send the
command :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency
:NTRansition <num>(negative transition) or :STATus:QUEStionable
:FREQuency:PTRansition <num>(positive transition) where <num>is the
sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status Frequency Event register latches transition events from
the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are
destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of
that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency
[:EVENt]?
how to set the summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the
command :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQ:ENABle<num>.
82
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Calibration Condition Register are
given in the following table.
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
0
1
2
0
2
4
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
TG Align Failure: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a
failure has occurred while trying to align the tracking
generator (TG).
3
4
5
8
RF Align Failure: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a
failure has occurred while trying to align the RF section.
16
32
IF Align Failure: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a
failure has occurred while trying to align the IF section.
LO Align Failure: A 1 in this bit position indicates that
a failure has occurred while trying to align the local oscillator
(LO).
6
7
8
64
ADC Align Failure: A 1 in this bit position indicates that
a failure has occurred while trying to align the
analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
128
256
FM Demod Align Failure: A 1 in this bit position
indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the
FM demodulation circuitry.
Misc/Sys Align Failure: A 1 in this bit position
indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the
quasi-peak detector.
9
512
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
10
1024
Tracking Peak Needed: A 1 in this bit position indicates
that a tracking peak needs to be performed (the tracking
generator is in operation). (Agilent EMC models E7402A,
E7403A, E7404A, and E7405A, with Option 1DN, Tracking
Generator, only).
11
2048
Align RF Skipped: A 1 in this bit position indicates that
the alignment of the RF section was skipped, perhaps due to
an external 50 MHz signal having been detected.
12
13
4096
8192
Align RF Now Needed: A 1 in this bit position indicates
that the RF section needs to be aligned.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
84
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
14
16384
Align Needed: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a full
alignment is needed, perhaps due to a large temperature
change having been detected with auto align off, or due to
default data being used.
15
32768
Always Zero (0): This bit is always set to 0.
Chapter 2
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated Register
Figure 2-14
Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Register Diagram
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition
Register are given in the following table.
86
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
0
0
Oversweep (Meas Uncal): A 1 in this position indicates
that the analyzer is in a state that could lead to uncalibrated
measurements. This is typically caused by sweeping too fast
for the current combination of span, resolution bandwidth, and
video bandwidth. Auto coupling may resolve this problem.
1
2
2
4
Signal Ident ON: A 1 in this bit position indicates that
amplitude measurements may be in error due to signal
identification routines being active. Amplitude accuracy is
degraded when signal identification is active.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
3
4
8
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
16
5
32
6
64
7
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16384 Unused: This bit is always set to 0.
32768 Always Zero (0): This bit is always set to 0.
Questionable Status Calibration Condition and
Event Enable Registers
The Questionable Status Calibration condition register continuously monitors the
calibration status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only. To query the
condition register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition?The response will be
the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition
register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be
positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to 0). Send the command
Chapter 2
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition <num>(negative
transition) or :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition
<num>(positive transition) where <num>is the sum of the decimal values of the
bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status Calibration Event register latches transition events from
the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are
destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of
that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration
[:EVENt]?
how to set the summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the
command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <num>.
Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition and
Event Enable Registers
The Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register continuously
monitors the calibration status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only.
To query the condition register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:CONDition?The
response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition
register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be
positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to 0). Send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition
<num>(negative transition) or
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition
<num>(positive transition) where <num>is the sum of the decimal values of the
bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Event Register latches transition
events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event
registers are destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear
the content of that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated[:EVENt]?
how to set the summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the
command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle
<num>.
88
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity Register
Figure 2-15
Questionable Status Integrity Register Diagram
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Integrity Condition Register are given
in the following table.
Chapter 2
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
Decimal
Value
Description
0
1
2
3
1
2
4
8
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
Data Uncalibrated Summary: This is the summary
bit for the Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated
Register.
4
16
IF/ADC Over Range: The signal input level is too high,
causing the analyzer analog-to-digital converter (ADC)
range to be exceeded. This may occur with resolution
bandwidths less than or equal to 300 Hz in zero span.
5
6
32
64
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
7
128
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
8
256
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
9
512
1024
2048
4096
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
10
11
12
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for
future use with other Agilent products.
Invalid Data: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the
present trace data does not reflect the existing analyzer
state. Trigger a new sweep and/or measurement.
13
14
15
8192
16384
32768
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for
future use with other Agilent products.
Always Zero (0): This bit is always set to 0.
90
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Questionable Status Integrity Event Condition and
Enable Registers
The Questionable Status Integrity Condition Register continuously monitors the
calibration status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only. To query the
condition register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition?The response will be
the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition
register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be
positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to 0). Send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <num>(negative
transition) or :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <num>
(positive transition) where <num>is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you
want to enable.
The Questionable Status Integrity Event Register latches transition events from the
condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are
destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of
that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]?
how to set the summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the
command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <num>.
Chapter 2
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
92
Chapter 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Programming Examples
This chapter includes examples of how to program the analyzer using the analyzer
SCPI programming commands. Twelve examples are written for an analyzer with
an GPIB interface (Option A4H). Three examples are written for an analyzer with
an RS-232 interface (Option 1AX).
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Programming Examples System Requirements
Programming Examples System Requirements
These examples were written for use on an IBM compatible PC configured as
follows:
•
Pentium processor
•
•
•
•
•
Windows 951 or Windows NT 4.0 operating system
C programming language
National Instruments GPIB interface card (for analyzers with Option A4H)
National Instruments VISA Transition Libraries (VTL)
COM1 serial port configured as follows (for analyzers with Option 1AX)
— 9600 baud
— 8 data bits
— 1 stop bit
— no parity bits
— hardware flow control
A HP/Agilent 82341C card may be substituted for the National Instruments GPIB,
and the HP VISA libraries may be substituted for the National Instruments VISA
Transition Libraries. If substitutions are made, the subdirectories for the include
and library files will be different than those listed in the following paragraphs.
Refer to the documentation for your interface card and the VISA libraries for
details.
1. Microsoft is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Chapter 3
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
C Programming Examples using VTL
C Programming Examples using VTL
The programming examples that are provided in this guide are written using the
C programming language and the VTL (VISA transition library). This section
includes some basic information about programming in the C language. Refer to
your C programming language documentation for more details. (This information
is taken from the manual “HP VISA Transition Library”, HP part number
E2090-90026.) If you are using the National Instruments VISA library, most of
this information will still apply, but the include and library files will be in different
subdirectories. Also, this information assumes a computer running a Windows 95
operating system with an HP/Agilent 82341C GPIB interface card is being used.
The following topics are included:
Typical Example Program Contents
The following is a summary of the VTL function calls used in the example
programs.
visa.h
This file is included at the beginning of the file to provide the
function prototypes and constants defined by VTL.
ViSession
The ViSessionis a VTL data type. Each object that will
establish a communication channel must be defined as
ViSession.
viOpenDefaultRM
You must first open a session with the default resource manager
with the viOpenDefaultRMfunction. This function will
initialize the default resource manager and return a pointer to
that resource manager session.
viOpen
This function establishes a communication channel with the
device specified. A session identifier that can be used with other
VTL functions is returned. This call must be made for each
device you will be using.
96
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
C Programming Examples using VTL
viPrintf
viScanf
These are the VTL formatted I/O functions that are patterned
after those used in the C programming language. The
viPrintfcall sends the SCPI commands to the analyzer. The
viPrintfcall can also be used to query the analyzer. The
viScanfcall is then used to read the results.
viClose
This function must be used to close each session. When you
close a device session, all data structures that had been allocated
for the session will be deallocated. When you close the default
manager session, all sessions opened using the default manager
session will be closed.
Linking to VTL Libraries
Your application must link to one of the VTL import libraries:
32-bit Version (assumes Windows 95 operating system):
C:\VXIPNP\WIN95\LIB\MSC\VISA32.LIBfor Microsoft compilers
C:\VXIPNP\WIN95\LIB\BC\VISA32.LIBfor Borland compilers
16-bit Version:
C:\VXIPNP\WIN\LIB\MSC\VISA.LIBfor Microsoft compilers
C:\VXIPNP\WIN\LIB\BC\VISA.LIBfor Borland compilers
See the following section for information on how to use the VTL run-time
libraries.
Compiling and Linking a VTL Program
32-bit Applications (assumes Windows 95 operating system)
The following is a summary of important compiler-specific considerations for
several C/C++ compiler products when developing WIN32 applications.
For Microsoft Visual C++ version 2.0 compilers:
•
•
Select Project | Update All Dependenciesfrom the menu.
Select Project | Settingsfrom the menu. Click on the C/C++button.
Select Code Generationfrom the Use Run-Time Librarieslist
box. VTL requires these definitions for WIN32. Click on OKto close the dialog
boxes.
Chapter 3
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
C Programming Examples using VTL
•
•
Select Project | Settingsfrom the menu. Click on the Linkbutton
and add visa32.libto the Object / Library Moduleslist box.
Optionally, you may add the library directly to your project file. Click on OKto
close the dialog boxes.
You may wish to add the include file and library file search paths. They are set
by doing the following:
1. Select Tools | Optionsfrom the menu.
2. Click on the Directoriesbutton to set the include file path.
3. Select Include Filesfrom the Show Directories Forlist box.
4. Click on the Addbutton and type in the following:
C:\VXIPNP\WIN95\INCLUDE
5. Select Library Filesfrom the Show Directories Forlist box.
6. Click on the Addbutton and type in the following:
C:\VXIPNP\WIN95\LIB\MSC
For Borland C++ version 4.0 compilers:
•
You may wish to add the include file and library file search paths. They are set
under the Options | Projectmenu selection. Double click on
Directoriesfrom the Topicslist box and add the following:
C:\VXIPNP\WIN95\INCLUDE
C:\VXIPNP\WIN95\LIB\BC
16-bit Applications
The following is a summary of important compiler-specific considerations for the
Windows compiler.
For Microsoft Visual C++ version 1.5:
•
To set the memory model, do the following:
1. Select Options | Project.
2. Click on the Compilerbutton, then select Memory Modelfrom the
Categorylist.
3. Click on the Modellist arrow to display the model options, and select
Large.
4. Click on OKto close the Compilerdialog box.
•
You may wish to add the include file and library file search paths. They are set
under the Options | Directoriesmenu selection:
C:\VXIPNP\WIN\INCLUDE
C:\VXIPNP\WIN\LIB\MSC
Otherwise, the library and include files should be explicitly specified in the
project file.
98
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
C Programming Examples using VTL
Example Program
This example program queries a GPIB device for an identification string and prints
the results. Note that you must change the address if something other than the
EMC default value of 18 is required.
/*idn.c - program filename */
#include "visa.h"
#include <stdio.h>
void main ()
{
/*Open session to GPIB device at address 18 */
ViOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
ViOpen(defaultRM, “GPIB0::18::INSTR”, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL, &vi);
/*Initialize device */
viPrintf(vi, “*RST\n”);
/*Send an *IDN? string to the device */
printf(vi, “*IDN?\n”);
/*Read results */
viScanf(vi, "%t", &buf);
/*Print results */
printf(“Instrument identification string: %s\n”, buf);
/* Close the sessions */
viClose(vi);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
Including the VISA Declarations File
For C and C++ programs, you must include the visa.hheader file at the
beginning of every file that contains VTL function calls:
#include “visa.h”
This header file contains the VISA function prototypes and the definitions for all
VISA constants and error codes. The visa.hheader file includes the
visatype.hheader file.
Chapter 3
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
C Programming Examples using VTL
The visatype.hheader file defines most of the VISA types. The VISA types are
used throughout VTL to specify data types used in the functions. For example, the
viOpenDefaultRMfunction requires a pointer to a parameter of type
ViSession. If you find ViSessionin the visatype.hheader file, you will
find that ViSessionis eventually typed as an unsigned long.
Opening a Session
A session is a channel of communication. Sessions must first be opened on the
default resource manager, and then for each device you will be using. The
following is a summary of sessions that can be opened:
•
A resource manager session is used to initialize the VISA system. It is a
parent session that knows about all the opened sessions. A resource manager
session must be opened before any other session can be opened.
•
A device session is used to communicate with a device on an interface. A
device session must be opened for each device you will be using. When you use
a device session you can communicate without worrying about the type of
interface to which it is connected. This insulation makes applications more
robust and portable across interfaces. Typically a device is an instrument, but
could be a computer, a plotter, or a printer.
NOTE
All devices that you will be using need to be connected and in working condition
prior to the first VTL function call (viOpenDefaultRM). The system is
configured only on the first viOpenDefaultRMper process. Therefore, if
viOpenDefaultRMis called without devices connected and then called again
when devices are connected, the devices will not be recognized. You must close
ALL resource manager sessions and re-open with all devices connected and in
working condition.
Device Sessions
There are two parts to opening a communications session with a specific device.
First you must open a session to the default resource manager with the
viOpenDefaultRMfunction. The first call to this function initializes the default
resource manager and returns a session to that resource manager session. You only
need to open the default manager session once. However, subsequent calls to
viOpenDefaultRMreturns a session to a unique session to the same default
resource manager resource.
Next, you open a session with a specific device with the viOpenfunction. This
function uses the session returned from viOpenDefaultRMand returns its own
session to identify the device session. The following shows the function syntax:
viOpenDefaultRM (sesn);
viOpen (sesn, rsrcName, accessMode, timeout, vi);
100
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
C Programming Examples using VTL
The session returned from viOpenDefaultRMmust be used in the sesn parameter
of the viOpenfunction. The viOpenfunction then uses that session and the
device address specified in the (resource name) parameter to open a device
session. The vi parameter in viOpenreturns a session identifier that can be used
with other VTL functions.
Your program may have several sessions open at the same time by creating
multiple session identifiers by calling the viOpenfunction multiple times.
The following summarizes the parameters in the previous function calls:
sesn
This is a session returned from the viOpenDefaultRM
function that identifies the resource manager session.
rsrcName
accessMode
timeout
vi
This is a unique symbolic name of the device (device address).
This parameter is not used for VTL. Use VI_NULL.
This parameter is not used for VTL. Use VI_NULL.
This is a pointer to the session identifier for this particular
device session. This pointer will be used to identify this device
session when using other VTL functions.
The following is an example of opening sessions with a GPIB multimeter and a
GPIB/VXI scanner:
ViSession defaultRM, dmm, scanner;
.
.
viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viOpen(defaultRM, “GPIB0::22::INSTR”, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL, &dmm);
viOpen(defaultRM, “GPIB-VXI0::24::INSTR”, VI_NULL,
VI_NULL, &scanner);
.
.
viClose(scanner);
viClose(dmm);
viClose(defaultRM);
Chapter 3
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
C Programming Examples using VTL
The above function first opens a session with the default resource manager. The
session returned from the resource manager and a device address is then used to
open a session with the GPIB device at address 22. That session will now be
identified as dmm when using other VTL functions. The session returned from the
resource manager is then used again with another device address to open a session
with the GPIB/VXI device at primary address 9 and VXI logical address 24. That
session will now be identified as scanner when using other VTL functions. See the
following section for information on addressing particular devices.
Addressing a Session
As seen in the previous section, the rsrcName parameter in the viOpenfunction is
used to identify a specific device. This parameter is made up of the VTL interface
name and the device address. The interface name is determined when you run the
VTL Configuration Utility. This name is usually the interface type followed by a
number. The following table illustrates the format of the rsrcName for the different
interface types:
Interface
VXI
Syntax
VXI [board]::VXI logical address[::INSTR]
GPIB/VXI
GPIB
GPIB-VXI [board]::VXI logical address[::INSTR]
GPIB [board]::primary address[::secondary address][::INSTR]
The following describes the parameters used above:
board
This optional parameter is used if you have more than one
interface of the same type. The default value for board is 0.
This is the logical address of the VXI instrument.
This is the primary address of the GPIB device.
VXI logical
address
primary
address
secondary
address
This optional parameter is the secondary address of the GPIB
device. If no secondary address is specified, none is assumed.
INSTR
This is an optional parameter that indicates that you are
communicating with a resource that is of type INSTR, meaning
instrument.
NOTE
If you want to be compatible with future releases of VTL and VISA, you must
include the INSTR parameter in the syntax.
The following are examples of valid symbolic names:
VXI0::24::INSTR Device at VXI logical address 24 that is of VISA type INSTR.
102
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
C Programming Examples using VTL
VXI2::128
Device at VXI logical address 128, in the third VXI system
(VXI2).
GPIB-VXI0::24 A VXI device at logical address 24. This VXI device is
connected via an GPIB/VXI command module.
GPIB0::7::0
An GPIB device at primary address 7 and secondary address 0
on the GPIB interface.
The following is an example of opening a device session with the GPIB device at
primary address 23.
ViSession defaultRM, vi;
.
.
viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viOpen(defaultRM, “GPIB0::23::INSTR”, VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&vi);
.
.
viClose(vi);
viClose(defaultRM);
Closing a Session
The viClosefunction must be used to close each session. You can close the
specific device session, which will free all data structures that had been allocated
for the session. If you close the default resource manager session, all sessions
opened using that resource manager will be closed.
Since system resources are also used when searching for resources (viFindRsrc)
or waiting for events (viWaitOnEvent), the viClosefunction needs to be
called to free up find lists and event contexts.
Chapter 3
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion
Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion
Example:
/************************************************************/
/* Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/*
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/* *RST
/* - Sets the analyzer center frequency, span and units
*CLS
/*
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:CENT freq
SENS:FREQ:SPAN freq
UNIT:POW DBM
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference */
/* CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
/* - Set the analyzer to single sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT 0
/* - Prompt the user for peak excursion and set them
/* CALC:MARK:PEAK:EXC dB
/* - Set the peak threshold to -90 dBm
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
TRAC:MATH:PEAK:THR:STAT ON
TRAC:MATH:PEAK:THR -90
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Set the marker to the maximum peak
/* CALC:MARK:MAX
/* - Query and read the marker frequency and amplitude
/*
/*
CALC:MARK:X?
CALC:MARK:Y?
/* - Close the session
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
104
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#definehpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char
int
cIdBuff[256]= {0};
cEnter = 0;
iResult = 0;
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void main()
{
Chapter 3
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion
/*Program Variables*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
double dMarkerFreq = 0;
double dMarkerAmpl = 0;
float fPeakExcursion =0;
long lOpc = 0L;
/*Open a GPIB session at address 18.*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Set Y-Axis units to dBm*/
viPrintf(viESA, "UNIT:POW DBM\n");
/*Set the analyzer center frequency to 50MHZ*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT 50e6\n");
/*Set the analyzer span to 50MHZ*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 50e6\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Marker Program \n\n" );
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Set analyzer to single sweep mode*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/*User enters the peak excursion value*/
printf("\t Enter PEAK EXCURSION in dB: ");
scanf( "%f",&fPeakExcursion);
/*Set the peak excursion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:PEAK:EXC %1fDB \n",fPeakExcursion);
106
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion
/*Set the peak thresold */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:PEAK:THR -90 \n");
/*Trigger a sweep and wait for completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/*Set the marker to the maximum peak*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX \n");
/*Query and read the marker frequency*/
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:X? \n","%lf",&dMarkerFreq);
printf("\n\t RESULT: Marker Frequency is: %lf MHZ \n\n",dMarkerFreq/10e5);
/*Query and read the marker amplitude*/
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%lf",&dMarkerAmpl);
printf("\t RESULT: Marker Amplitude is: %lf dBm \n\n",dMarkerAmpl);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
Chapter 3
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search
Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum
Search
/************************************************************/
/* Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/*
*RST
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference */
/* CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
/* - Set the analyzer to single sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT 0
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Prompts the user for the start and stop frequencies
/* - Sets the start and stop frequencies
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:START freq
SENS:FREQ:STOP freq
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Set the marker to the maximum peak
/* CALC:MARK:MAX
/* - Set the analyzer to activate the delta marker
/* CALC:MARK:MODE DELT
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Set the marker to the minimum amplitude mode
/* CALC:MARK:MIN
/* - Query and read the marker amplitude
/* CALC:MARK:Y?
/* - Close the session
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
108
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#define hpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char cEnter = 0;
int iResult =0;
cIdBuff[256] ={0};
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/* E4401B, E4411B and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void main()
{
/*Program Variable*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
double dStartFreq =0.0;
double dStopFreq =0.0;
Chapter 3
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search
double dMarkerAmplitude = 0.0;
long lOpc =0L;
/* Open an GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Marker Delta Program \n\n" );
/*Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Set the analyzer to single sweep mode*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0\n");
/*Prompt the user for the start frequency*/
printf("\t Enter the Start frequency in MHz ");
/*The user enters the start frequency*/
scanf("%lf",&dStartFreq);
/*Prompt the user for the stop frequency*/
printf("\t Enter the Stop frequency in MHz ");
/*The user enters the stop frequency*/
scanf("%lf",&dStopFreq);
/*Set the analyzer to the values given by the user*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:STAR %lf MHZ \n;:SENS:FREQ:STOP%lf
MHZ\n",dStartFreq,dStopFreq);
/*Trigger a sweep, wait for completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/*Set the marker to the maximum peak*/
110
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX\n");
/*Set the analyzer to activate delta marker mode*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MODE DELT\n");
/*Trigger a sweep, wait for completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/*Set the marker to minimum amplitude*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MIN\n");
/*Query and read the marker amplitude*/
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%lf",&dMarkerAmplitude);
/*print the marker amplitude*/
printf("\n\n\tRESULT: Marker Amplitude Delta =%lf dB\n\n",dMarkerAmplitude);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
Chapter 3
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Performing Internal Self-alignment
Performing Internal Self-alignment
/************************************************************/
/* Performing Internal Self-alignment
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This example shows two ways of executing an internal
/* self-alignment. The first demonstrates using the *OPC? */
/* query to determine when the alignment has completed. The */
/* second demonstrates using the query form of the CAL:ALL */
/* command to not only determine when the alignment has
*/
/* been completed, but the pass/fail status of the align- */
/* ment process.
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/*
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/* *RST
*CLS
/* - VISA function sets the time out to infinite
/* - Initiate self-alignment
/*
/* - Query for operation complete
/* *OPC?
/* - Query for results of self-alignment
/* CAL:ALL?
CAL:ALL
/* - Report the results of the self-alignment
/* - Close the session
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
112
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Performing Internal Self-alignment
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#definehpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char
int
cIdBuff[256]= {0};
cEnter = 0;
iResult = 0;
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B, and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void main()
{
/*Program Variables*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
long lOpc =0L;
long lResult =0L;
/* Open a GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
Chapter 3
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Performing Internal Self-alignment
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Internal Self-Alignment Program \n\n" );
/*Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz-signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*VISA function sets the time out to infinite for this specified session*/
viSetAttribute(viESA, VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE, VI_TMO_INFINITE);
printf("\t Performing first self alignment ..... " );
/*Initiate a self-alignment */
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:ALL\n");
/*Query for operation complete*/
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
printf ("\n\n\t First Self Alignment is Done \n\n");
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! error ocurred: last command was not completed!\n");
exit(0);
}
printf ("\n\n\t Press Return to continue with next alignment \n\n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
printf("\t Performing next self alignment ..... " );
/* Query for self-alignment results*/
viQueryf(viESA,"CAL:ALL?\n","%d",&lResult);
if (lResult)
printf ("\n\n\t Self-alignment Failed \n");
else
printf ("\n\n\t Self-alignment Passed \n");
/* Query for operation complete*/
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
114
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Performing Internal Self-alignment
{
}
printf("Program Abort! error ocurred: last command was not completed!\n");
exit(0);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
Chapter 3
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format (GPIB)
Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format (GPIB)
/************************************************************/
/* Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format (GPIB)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The required SCPI instrument commands are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/*
*RST
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference */
/* E4411B or E4401B
/* CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
/* E4402, E4403B, E4404BE, 4405B, E4407B or E4408B
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
Prompt to connect AMPTD REF OUT to INPUT
CAL:SOUR STAT ON
/* - Query for the number of sweep points (only applies to */
/* firmware revisions A.04.00 and later); default is 401 */
/*
/* - Sets the analyzer center frequency to 50 MHz
/* SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHZ
/* - Sets the analyzer span to 50 MHz
/* SENS:FREQ:SPAN 50 MHZ
/* - Set the analyzer to single sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT 0
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Specify units in dBm
/* UNIT:POW DBM
/* - Set the analyzer trace data to ASCII
/* FORM:DATA: ASC
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Query the trace data
/* TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
SENS:SWE:POIN?
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Remove the "," from the ACSII data
/* - Save the trace data to an ASCII file
/* - Close the session
116
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format (GPIB)
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#definehpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
cIdBuff[256] ={0};
char cEnter =0;
int
iResult =0;
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
Chapter 3
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format (GPIB)
void main()
{
/*Program Variable*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
/*Dimension cResult to 13 bytes per sweep point, 8192 sweep points maximum*/
ViChar _VI_FAR cResult[106496] = {0};
FILE *fTraceFile;
static ViChar *cToken ;
int iNum =0;
int iSwpPnts = 401;
long lCount=0L;
long lOpc=0;
/*iNum set to 13 times number of sweep points, 8192 sweep points maximum*/
iNum =106496;
lCount =0;
/* Open a GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/* Clear the instrument */
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument. This will set number of sweep points to default of 401*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Read in Trace Data using ASCII Format (GPIB) Program \n\n" );
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Query number of sweep points per trace (firmware revision A.04.00 and later)*/
/*For firmware revisions prior to A.04.00, the number of sweep points is 401*/
iSwpPnts = 401;
viQueryf(viESA,"SENSE:SWEEP:POINTS?\n","%d",&iSwpPnts);
/*Set the analyzer center frequency to 50MHz*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHz\n");
/*Set the analyzer to 50MHz Span*/
118
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format (GPIB)
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 50 MHz\n");
/*Set the analyzer to single sweep mode */
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/*Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete */
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/* Specify units in dBm*/
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW DBM \n");
/*Set analyzer trace data format to ASCII Format*/
viPrintf(viESA,"FORM:DATA ASC \n");
/*Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete */
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/*Query the Trace Data using ASCII Format */
viQueryf(viESA,"%s\n", "%#t","TRAC:DATA? TRACE1" , &iNum , cResult);
/*Remove the "," from the ASCII trace data for analyzing data*/
cToken = strtok(cResult,",");
/*Save trace data to an ASCII to a file, by removing the "," token*/
fTraceFile=fopen("C:\\temp\\ReadAscGpib.txt","w");
fprintf(fTraceFile,"ReadAscGpib.exe Output\nAgilent Technologies 2000\n\n");
fprintf(fTraceFile,"\tAmplitude of point[%d] =%s dBm\n",lCount+1,cToken);
while (cToken != NULL)
{
lCount++;
cToken =strtok(NULL,",");
if (lCount != iSwpPnts)
fprintf(fTraceFile,"\tAmplitude of point[%d] =%s
dBm\n",lCount+1,cToken);
}
fprintf(fTraceFile,"\nThe Total trace data points of the spectrum are:[%d]
\n\n",lCount);
fclose(fTraceFile);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
Chapter 3
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (GPIB)
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit
Real Format (GPIB)
/************************************************************/
/* Reading Trace Data using 32-bit Real Format (GPIB)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/*
*RST
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference */
/*
CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Query for the number of sweep points (for firmware
/* revisions A.04.00 and later). Default is 401.
/*
SENS:SWE:POIN?
/* - Calculate the number of bytes in the header
/* - Set the analyzer to single sweep mode
/*
INIT:CONT 0
/* - Sets the analyzer center frequency and span to 50 MHz */
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHZ
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 50 MHZ
*/
*/
/* - Specify 10 dB per division for the amplitude scale in */
/* and dBm Units
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:PDIV 10 dB
UNIT:POW DBM
/* - Set the analyzer trace data to 32-bit Real
/* FORM:DATA: REAL,32
/* - Set the binary order to swap
/* FORM:BORD SWAP
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Calculate the number of bytes in the trace record
/* - Query the trace data
/*
TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
/* - Remove the "," from the ACSII data
/* - Save the trace data to an ASCII file
/* - Close the session
*/
*/
120
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (GPIB)
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#define hpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViChar
cIdBuff[256];
char cEnter =0;
int
iResult =0;
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz internal reference source for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user to*/
/* connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void main()
{
Chapter 3
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (GPIB)
/*Program Variables*/
ViStatus viStatus= 0;
ViChar _VI_FAR cResult[5000] = {0};
ViReal32 dTraceArray[401] = {0};
char cBufferInfo[6]= {0};
long lNumberBytes =0L;
long lOpc =0L;
unsigned long lRetCount = 0L;
int iSize = 0;
/*BytesPerPoint is 4 for Real32 or Int32 formats, 8 for Real64, and 2 for Uint16*/
int iBytesPerPnt = 4;
int iSwpPnts = 401;
int iDataBytes=1604;
int iHeaderBytes=6;
FILE *fTraceFile;
/* Open a GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the instrument */
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument. This will set number of sweep points to default of 401*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Read in Trace Data using 32-bit Real Format (using GPIB) \n\n" );
/* Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Query number of sweep points per trace (firmware revision A.04.00 and later)*/
/*For firmware revisions prior to A.04.00, the number of sweep points is 401*/
iSwpPnts=401;
viQueryf(viESA,"SENSE:SWEEP:POINTS?\n","%d",&iSwpPnts);
/*Calculate number of bytes in the header. The header consists of the "#" sign*/
/*followed by a digit representing the number of digits to follow. The digits */
/*which follow represent the number of sweep points multiplied by the number */
/*of bytes per point. */
iHeaderBytes = 3;
/*iDataBytes >3, plus increment for "#" and "n"*/
122
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (GPIB)
iDataBytes = (iSwpPnts*iBytesPerPnt);
lNumberBytes = iDataBytes;
while ((iDataBytes = (iDataBytes / 10 )) > 0 )
{
iHeaderBytes++;
}
/*Set analyzer to single sweep mode */
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/*Set the analyzer to 50MHz-center frequency */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHZ\n");
/*Set the analyzer to 50MHz Span */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 50 MHZ\n");
/* Specify dB per division of each vertical division and Units */
viPrintf(viESA,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:PDIV 10dB\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW DBM\n");
/*Set analyzer trace data format to 32-bit Real */
viPrintf(viESA,"FORM:DATA REAL,32 \n");
/*Set the binary byte order to SWAP */
viPrintf(viESA, "FORM:BORD SWAP\n");
/*Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/*Calculate size of trace record. This will be sum of HeaderBytes, NumberBytes*/
/*(the actual data bytes) and the "/n" terminator*/
iSize = lNumberBytes +iHeaderBytes+1;
/*Get trace header data and trace data */
viPrintf(viESA,"TRAC:DATA? TRACE1\n");
viRead (viESA,(ViBuf)cResult,iSize,&lRetCount);
/*Extract the trace data*/
memcpy(dTraceArray,cResult+iHeaderBytes,(size_t)lNumberBytes);
/*Save trace data to an ASCII file*/
fTraceFile=fopen("C:\\temp\\ReadTrace32Gpib.txt","w");
fprintf(fTraceFile,"ReadTrace32Gpib.exe Output\nAgilent Technologies 2000\n\n");
fprintf(fTraceFile,"The%d trace data points of the
spectrum:\n\n",(lNumberBytes/4));
for ( long i=0;i<lNumberBytes/4;i++)
Chapter 3
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (GPIB)
fprintf(fTraceFile,"\tAmplitude of point[%d] =%.2lf
dBm\n",i+1,dTraceArray[i]);
fclose(fTraceFile);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
124
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format (RS-232)
Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format (RS-232)
/************************************************************/
/* Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format (RS-232)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens an RS-232 session at COM1/COM2
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/*
*RST
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference */
/*
CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Query for the number of sweep points (for firmware
/* revisions A.04.00 and later). Default is 401.
/*
/* - Set the analyzer to single sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT 0
SENS:SWE:POIN?
/* - Sets the analyzer center frequency and span to 50 MHz */
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHZ
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 50 MHZ
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Trigger a sweep
/* INIT:IMM
/* - Check for operation complete
/* *OPC?
/* - Specify dBm Unit
/* UNIT:POW DBM
/* - Set the analyzer trace data ASCII
/* FORM:DATA: ASC
/* - Trigger a sweep
/* INIT:IMM
/* - Check for operation complete
/* *OPC?
/* - Query the trace data
/* TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
/* - Remove the "," from the ACSII data
/* - Save the trace data to an ASCII file
/* - Close the session
/************************************************************/
Chapter 3
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format (RS-232)
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#define hpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char cEnter ={0};
int iResult =0;
cIdBuff[256] ={0};
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4411B and E4401B*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user to/*
/* connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void main()
126
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format (RS-232)
{
/*Program Variable*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
/*Dimension cResult to 13 bytes per sweep point, 8192 sweep points maximum*/
ViChar _VI_FAR cResult[106496] = {0};
FILE *fTraceFile;
static ViChar *cToken;
int iNum =0;
int iSwpPnts = 401;
long lCount=0L;
long lOpc=0L;
/*iNum set to 13 times number of sweep points, 8192 sweep points maximum*/
iNum =106496;
lCount =0;
/* Open a serial session at COM1 */
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
if (viStatus =viOpen(defaultRM,"ASRL1::INSTR",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA) !=
VI_SUCCESS)
{
printf("Could not open a session to ASRL device at COM1!\n");
exit(0);
}
/* Clear the instrument */
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument. This will set number of sweep points to default of 401*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\tRead in Trace Data using ASCII Format (RS232) Program \n\n" );
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Query number of sweep points per trace (firmware revision A.04.00 and later)*/
/*For firmware revisions prior to A.04.00, the number of sweep points is 401 */
iSwpPnts = 401;
viQueryf(viESA, "SENSE:SWEEP:POINTS?\n","%d",&iSwpPnts);
/*Set the analyzer center frequency to 50MHz */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHz\n");
/*Set the analyzer to 50MHz Span*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 50 MHz\n");
Chapter 3
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format (RS-232)
/*set the analyzer to single sweep mode*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/*Trigger a spectrum measurement*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM \n");
/*Read the operation complete query*/
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! error ocurred: last command was not completed!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Specify units in dBm*/
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW DBM \n");
/*Set analyzer trace data format to ASCII Format*/
viPrintf(viESA,"FORM:DATA ASC \n");
/*Trigger a spectrum measurement*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM \n");
/*Read the operation complete query */
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! error ocurred: last command was not completed!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Query the Trace Data using ASCII Format */
viQueryf(viESA,"%s\n", "%#t","TRAC:DATA? TRACE1" , &iNum , cResult);
/*Remove the "," from the ASCII trace data for analyzing data*/
cToken = strtok(cResult,",");
/*Save trace data to an ASCII to a file, by removing the "," token*/
fTraceFile=fopen("C:\\temp\\ReadAscRS232.txt","w");
fprintf(fTraceFile,"ReadAscRS232.exe Output\nHewlett-Packard 1999\n\n");
fprintf(fTraceFile,"\tAmplitude of point[%d] =%s dBm\n",lCount+1,cToken);
while (cToken != NULL)
{
lCount++;
cToken =strtok(NULL,",");
if (lCount != iSwpPnts)
fprintf(fTraceFile,"\tAmplitude of point[%d] =%s
128
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format (RS-232)
dBm\n",lCount+1,cToken);
}
fprintf(fTraceFile,"\nThe Total trace data points of the spectrum are:[%d]
\n\n",lCount);
fclose(fTraceFile);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
Chapter 3
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (RS-232)
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (RS-232)
/************************************************************/
/* Reading Trace Data using 32-bit Real Format (RS-232)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens an RS-232 session at COM1/COM2
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/*
*RST
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference */
/*
CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Query for the number of sweep points (for firmware
/* revision A.04.00 and later). Default is 401.
/*
SENS:SWE:POIN?
/* - Calculate the number of bytes in the header
/* - Set the analyzer to single sweep mode
/*
INIT:CONT 0
/* - Sets the analyzer center frequency and span to 50 MHz */
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHZ
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 50 MHZ
*/
*/
/* - Specify 10 dB per division for the amplitude scale in */
/* and dBm Units
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:PDIV 10 dB
UNIT:POW DBM
/* - Set the analyzer trace data to 32-bit Real
/* FORM:DATA: REAL,32
/* - Set the binary order to swap
/* FORM:BORD SWAP
/* - Trigger a sweep
/* INIT:IMM
/* - Check for operation complete
/* *OPC?
/* - Calculate the number of bytes in the trace record
/* - Set VISA timeout to 60 seconds, to allow for slower
/* transfer times caused by higher number of sweep points */
/* at low baud rates.
*/
*/
/* - Set VISA to terminate read after buffer is empty
130
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (RS-232)
/* - Query the trace data
/* TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds
/* - Remove the "," from the ACSII data
/* - Save the trace data to an ASCII file
/* - Close the session
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#definehpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char
int
cIdBuff[256]= {0};
cEnter = 0;
iResult = 0;
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4411B and E4401B*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user to*/
/* connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
Chapter 3
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (RS-232)
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void main()
{
/*Program Variables*/
ViStatus viStatus= 0;
ViChar _VI_FAR cResult[1024000] = {0};
ViReal32 dTraceArray[1024] = {0};
char cBufferInfo[7]= {0};
long lNumberBytes =0L;
long lOpc =0L;
unsigned long lRetCount = 0L;
int iSize = 0;
/*BytesPerPnt is 4 for Real32 or Int32 formats, 8 for Real64, and 2 for Uint16*/
int iBytesPerPnt = 4;
int iSwpPnts = 401; /*Number of points per sweep*/
int iDataBytes = 1604;/*Number of data points, assuming 4 bytes per point*/
int iHeaderBytes = 6; /*Number of bytes in the header, assuming 1604 data bytes*/
FILE *fTraceFile;
/* Open a serial session at COM1 */
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
if (viStatus =viOpen(defaultRM,"ASRL1::INSTR",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA) !=
VI_SUCCESS)
{
printf("Could not open a session to ASRL device at COM1!!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the instrument */
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument. This will set number of sweep points to default of 401*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Read in Trace Data using ASCII Format (using RS-232) Program \n\n"
);
/* Set the input port to the internal 50MHz reference source */
Route50MHzSignal();
132
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (RS-232)
/*Query number of sweep points per trace (firmware revision A.04.00 or later)*/
/*For firmware revisions prior to A.04.00, the number of sweep points is 401 */
iSwpPnts = 401;
viQueryf(viESA,"SENSE:SWEEP:POINTS?\n","%d",&iSwpPnts);
/*Calculate number of bytes in the header. The header consists of the "#" sign*/
/*followed by a digit representing the number of digits to follow. The digits */
/*which follow represent the number of sweep points multiplied by the number */
/*of bytes per point. */
iHeaderBytes = 3;
/*iDataBytes >0, plus increment for "#" and "n" */
iDataBytes = (iSwpPnts*iBytesPerPnt);
lNumberBytes = iDataBytes;
while ((iDataBytes = (iDataBytes / 10 )) > 0 )
{
iHeaderBytes++;
}
/*Set analyzer to single sweep mode */
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/* Set the analyzer to 50MHz-center frequency */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHZ\n");
/*Set the analyzer to 50MHz Span */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 50 MHZ\n");
/* Specify dB per division of each vertical division & Units */
viPrintf(viESA,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:PDIV 10dB\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW DBM\n");
/*Set analyzer trace data format to 32-bit Real */
viPrintf(viESA,"FORM:DATA REAL,32\n");
/*Set the binary byte order to SWAP */
viPrintf(viESA, "FORM:BORD SWAP\n");
/*Trigger a sweep */
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM\n");
/*Read the operation complete query */
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! error ocurred: last command was not completed!\n");
exit(0);
}
Chapter 3
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Reading Trace Data Using 32-bit Real Format (RS-232)
/*Calculate size of trace record. This will be the sum of HeaderBytes, Number*/
/*Bytes (the actual data bytes) and the "\n" terminator*/
iSize = lNumberBytes + iHeaderBytes + 1;
/*Increase timeout to 60 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,60000);
/*Set RS-232 interface to terminate when the buffer is empty*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_ASRL_END_IN,VI_ASRL_END_NONE);
/*Get trace header data and trace data*/
viPrintf(viESA,"TRAC:DATA? TRACE1\n");
viRead (viESA,(ViBuf)cResult,iSize,&lRetCount);
/*Reset timeout to 3 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,3000);
/*Extract the trace data*/
memcpy(dTraceArray,cResult+iHeaderBytes,(size_t)lNumberBytes);
/*Save trace data to an ASCII file*/
fTraceFile=fopen("C:\\temp\\ReadTrace32Rs232.txt","w");
fprintf(fTraceFile,"ReadTrace32Rs232.exe Output\nHewlett-Packard 1999\n\n");
fprintf(fTraceFile,"The%d trace data points of the
spectrum:\n\n",(lNumberBytes/4));
for ( long i=0;i<lNumberBytes/iBytesPerPnt;i++)
fprintf(fTraceFile,"\tAmplitude of point[%d] =%.2lf
dBm\n",i+1,dTraceArray[i]);
fclose(fTraceFile);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
134
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Limit Lines
Using Limit Lines
/************************************************************/
/* Using Limit Lines
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/*
/* - Open a GPIB session at address 18.
/* - Clear the analyzer.
/*
/* - Reset the analyzer.
/* *RST
/* - Set Y-Axis Units to dBm
/* UNIT:POW DBM
*CLR
/* - Define the upper limit line to have frequency/
/* amplitude pairs.
/*
/*
/*
/*
CALC:LLINE1:CONT:DOM FREQ
CALC:LLINE1:TYPE UPP
CALC:LLINE1:DISP ON
CALC:LLINE1:DATA freq1,amp1,1,freq2,amp2,1...
/* - Define the lower limit line to have frequency/amplitude*/
/* pairs.
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
CALC:LLINE2:CONT:DOM FREQ
CALC:LLINE2:TYPE LOW
CALC:LLINE2:DISP ON
CALC:LLINE2:DATA freq1,amp1,1,freq2,amp2,1...
/* - Turn the limit line test function on.
/* CALC:LLINE2:STAT ON
/* - Set the analyzer to a center frequency of 50 MHz, span */
/* to 20 MHz, and resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz.
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 20 MHZ
SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHZ
SENS:BWID:RES 1 MHZ
/* - Turn the limit line test function on.
/* - Set the analyzer reference level to 0 dBm.
/*
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 0
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference. */
/*
CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
*/
Chapter 3
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Limit Lines
/* - Check to see if limit line passes or fails. It should */
/* pass.
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
CALC:LLINE:FAIL?
/* - Pause for 5 seconds.
/* - Deactivate the 50 MHz alignment signal.
/*
CAL:SOUR:STAT OFF
/* - The limit line test should fail.
/* - Close the session.
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <windows.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define YIELD Sleep(5000)
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#define hpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char
int
cIdBuff[256]= {0};
cEnter = 0;
iResult = 0;
long lLimitTest =0L;
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B, and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
136
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Limit Lines
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void printResult()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "CALC:CLIM:FAIL?\n", "%ld", &lLimitTest);
if (lLimitTest!=0)
{
printf ("\n\t..Limit Line Failed.....\n");
viQueryf(viESA, "CALC:LLINE1:FAIL?\n", "%ld", &lLimitTest);
if (lLimitTest==0)
printf ("\n\t......Limit Line1 Passed \n");
else printf ("\n\t......Limit Line1 Failed \n");
viQueryf(viESA, "CALC:LLINE2:FAIL?\n", "%ld", &lLimitTest);
if (lLimitTest==0)
printf ("\n\t......Limit Line2 Passed \n");
else printf ("\n\t......Limit Line2 Failed \n");
}
else
printf ("\n\t..Limit Test Pass\n");
}
void main()
{
/*Program Variable*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
long lOpc =0L;
/* Open a GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
Chapter 3
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Limit Lines
/*Clear the instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly*/
/*Route50MHzSignal();
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Limit Lines Program \n\n" );
/*Set the Y-Axis Units to dBm */
viPrintf(viESA, "UNIT:POW DBM\n");
/*Set to Frequency Domain Mode*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:LLINE1:CONT:DOM FREQ\n");
/*Delete any current limit line and define the upper limit line
to have the following frequency/amplitude pairs*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:LLINE1:TYPE UPP\n");
/* Turn on display*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:LLINE1:DISP ON\n");
/*Send the upper limit line data*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:LLINE1:DATA 40E06,-50,1, 45E06,-20,1, 50E06,-15,1,
55E06,-20,1, 60E06,-50,1\n");
/* Turn on display*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:LLINE1:DISP ON\n");
/*Delete any current limit line and define the lower limit line
to have the following frequency/amplitude pairs*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:LLINE2:TYPE LOW\n");
/*Send the lower limit line data*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:LLINE2:DATA
40E06,-100,1,49.99E06,-100,1,50E06,-30,1,50.01E06,-100,1,60E06,-100,1\n");
/* Turn on display*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:LLINE2:DISP ON\n");
/*Turn the limit line test function on.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:LLINE2:STAT ON\n");
138
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Limit Lines
/*Set the analyzer to a center frequency of 50 MHz, span to 20 MHz,
and resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT 50e6\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 20e6\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:BWID:RES 1e6\n");
/*Set the analyzer reference level to 0 dBm*/
viPrintf(viESA,"DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 0 \n");
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz-signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Trigger a spectrum measurement*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM \n");
/*Check for operation complete */
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! error ocurred: last command was not completed!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Check to see if limit line passes or fails. It should pass.*/
printf ("\n\t Limit Line status after activating the 50MHz signal \n");
/*Print the limits line result*/
printResult();
/*Pause for 5 seconds*/
YIELD;
/*Deactivate the 50 MHz alignment signal.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT OFF\n");
/*Trigger a spectrum measurement*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM \n");
/*Check for operation complete */
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! error ocurred: last command was not completed!\n");
exit(0);
}
/* The limit line test should fail.*/
printf ("\n\t Limit Line status after de-activating the 50MHz signal \n");
Chapter 3
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Using Limit Lines
/*Print the limits line result*/
printResult();
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
140
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Noise
Measuring Noise
/************************************************************/
/* Measuring Noise
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/*
*RST
/* - Sets the center frequency and span
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHZ
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10 MHZ
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference */
/* CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
/* - Set the analyzer to single sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT 0
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Set the marker to the maximum peak
/* CALC:MARK:MAX
/* - Set the analyzer to active delta marker
/* CALC:MARK:MODE DELT
/* - Set the delta marker to 2 MHZ
/* CALC:MARK:X 2E+6
/* - Activate the noise marker function
/* CALC:MARK:FUNC NOIS
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Query the marker delta amplitude from the analyzer
/* CALC:MARK:Y?
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Report the marker delta amplitude as the carrier to
/* noise ratio in dBc/Hz
/* - Close the session
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
Chapter 3
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Noise
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#definehpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char
int
cIdBuff[256]= {0};
cEnter = 0;
iResult = 0;
lOpc =0L;
long
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B amd E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void main()
{
142
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Noise
/*Program Variables*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
double dMarkAmp =0.0;
long lOpc=0L;
/*Open a GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the Instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the Instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Noise Program \n\n" );
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Set the analyzer center frequency to 50MHz*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT 50e6\n");
/*Set the analyzer span to 10MHz*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10e6\n");
/*Set the analyzer in a single sweep mode*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/*Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI \n");
/*Set the marker to the maximum peak*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX \n");
/*Check for operation complete*/
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! error ocurred: last command was not completed!\n");
exit(0);
Chapter 3
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Noise
}
/*Set the analyzer in a single sweep mode*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/*Trigger a spectrum measurement*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM \n");
/*Set the analyzer in active delta marker mode*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MODE DELT \n");
/*Set the marker delta frequency to 2 MHz. This places the
active marker two divisions to the right of the input signal.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:X 2E+6 \n");
/*Activate the noise marker function.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:FUNC NOIS \n");
/*Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI \n");
/*Query and read the marker delta amplitude from the analyzer*/
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y? \n","%lf",&dMarkAmp);
/*Report the marker delta amplitude as the carrier-to-noise ratio in dBc/Hz*/
printf("\t Marker Amplitude =%lf dBc/Hz\n",dMarkAmp);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
144
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Entering Amplitude Correction Data
Entering Amplitude Correction Data
/************************************************************/
/* Entering Amplitude Correction Data
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/*
/* - Sets the stop frequency to 1.5 GHz
/* SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5 GHZ
*RST
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference */
/* CAL:SOUR:STAT ON */
/* - Enter amplitude correction frequency/amplitude pairs: */
/* 0 Hz/ 0 dB, 100 MHz/5 dB, 1 GHz/-5 dB, 1.5 GHz/ 10 dB */
/*
SENS:CORR:CSET1:DATA 0,0,100E6,5.0,1.0E9,-5.0,... */
/* - Activate amplitude correction
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
SENS:CORR:CSET1:DATA
SENS:CORR:CSET1:ALL:STAT ON
/* - Query the analyzer for the amplitude corection factors */
/*
SENS:CORR:CSET1:DATA?
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Store them in an array
/* - Display the array
/* - Close the session
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#define hpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
Chapter 3
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Entering Amplitude Correction Data
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char
int
cIdBuff[256]= {0};
cEnter = 0;
iResult = 0;
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B, and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void main()
{
/*Program Variables*/
ViChar _VI_FAR cResult[1024] ={0};
ViReal64 _VI_FAR aRealArray[2][100] ={0};
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
int iNum =0;
int iNoOfPoints =0;
long lCount = 0;
long lFreq=0L;
long lAmpltd=1;
static ViChar *cToken;
146
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Entering Amplitude Correction Data
/*No of amplitude corrections points */
iNoOfPoints = 4;
/* Open a GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Amplitude Correction Program \n\n" );
/*Set the stop frequency to 1.5 GHz */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5 GHz\n");
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/* Purge any currently-loaded amplitude correction factors*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:CORR:CSET1:DEL \n");
/* Enter amp cor frequency/amplitude pairs:
0 Hz, 0 dB, 100 MHz, 5 dB, 1 GHz, -5 dB, 1.5GHz,10*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:CORR:CSET1:DATA ");
viPrintf(viESA,"0, 0.0,");
viPrintf(viESA,"100.E6, 5.0,");
viPrintf(viESA,"1.E9, -5.0,");
viPrintf(viESA,"1.5E9, 10 \n");
/* Activate amplitude correction. Notice that the noise floor slopes
up from 0 Hz to 100 MHz, then downward by 10 dB to 1 GHz, then upwards
again by 15 dB to 1.5 GHz.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:CORR:CSET1:STATE ON \n");
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:CORR:CSET:ALL:STAT ON \n");
/*Query the analyzer for its amplitude correction factors */
viQueryf(viESA,"SENS:CORR:CSET1:DATA?" , "%s" , &cResult);
Chapter 3
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Entering Amplitude Correction Data
/*Remove the "," from the amplitude correction for analyzing data*/
cToken = strtok(cResult,",");
/*Store the array (frequency) value into a two-dimensional real array*/
aRealArray[lFreq=0][lCount=0] = atof( cToken);
/*Remove the "," from the amplitude correction for analyzing data*/
cToken =strtok(NULL,",");
/*Store the array(amplitude) value into a two-dimensional real array*/
aRealArray[lAmpltd=1][lCount] = atof(cToken);
while (cToken != NULL)
{
lCount++;
if (lCount == iNoOfPoints)
{
lCount --;
break;
}
/*Remove the "," from the amplitude correction for analyzing data*/
cToken =strtok(NULL,",");
/*Store the array (frequency) value into a two-dimensional real array*/
aRealArray[lFreq][lCount] = atof(cToken);
cToken =strtok(NULL,",");
/*Store the array (amplitude) value into a two-dimensional real array*/
aRealArray[lAmpltd][lCount] = atof(cToken);
}
/*Display the contents of the array.*/
for (long i=0;i<=lCount;i++)
{
printf("\tFrequency of point[%d] =%f MHz\n",i,aRealArray[lFreq][i]/1e6);
printf("\tAmplitude of point[%d] =%f dB\n",i,aRealArray[lAmpltd][i]);
}
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
148
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Status Register–Determine When a Measurement is Done
Status Register–Determine When a Measurement is
Done
/************************************************************/
/* Status Register - Determine when a measurement is done */
/*
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/*
/* - Clears the analyzer status byte
/* *CLS
/* - Sets the analyzer to single sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT 0
/* - Route the amplitude reference to the analyzer input
/* CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
/* - Set the analyzer center frequency, span and Res BW
*RST
/*
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHz
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10 MHz
SENS:BAND:RES 300 kHz
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for completion of sweep
/*
/*
INIT:IMM
*OPC?
/* - Sets the service request mask to assert SRQ when
/* either a measurement is uncalibrated or an error
/* message has occurred.
/*
/*
*SRE 96
*ESE 35
/* - Set the computer to response to an interrupt
/* - Send an undefined command to the ESA
/*
IDN (illegal command)
/* - Wait for the SRQ
/* - When an interrupt occurs, poll all instruments
/* - Report the nature of the interrupt on the ESA analyzer */
/* - Pause 5 seconds to observe the analyzer
/* - Set the ESA to perform 80 video averages
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
SENS:AVER:TYPE LPOW
SENS:AVER:COUN 80
Chapter 3
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Status Register–Determine When a Measurement is Done
/*
SENS:AVER:STAT ON
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Trigger a measurement, and set OPC bit when done
/*
/*
INIT:IMM
*OPC
/* - Wait for the SRQ
/* - When an interrupt occurs, poll all instruments
/* - Report the nature of the interrupt on the ESA analyzer */
/* - Clear the status register enable
/* *SRE 0
/* - Clear the status byte of the ESA
/* *CLS
/* - Close the session
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <windows.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#define hpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
#define YIELD Sleep(10)
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
cIdBuff[256] = {0};
ViAddr iAddress;
char cEnter =0;
int
int
iResult =0;
iSrqOccurred=0;
char cBuf[3]={0};
/*Wait until SRQ is generated and for the handler to be called. Print
something while waiting. When interrupt occurs it will be handled by
interrupt handler*/
void WaitForSRQ()
{
long lCount = 0L;
iSrqOccurred
=0;
150
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Status Register–Determine When a Measurement is Done
printf ("\t\nWaiting for an SRQ to be generated ...");
for (lCount =0;(lCount<10) && (iSrqOccurred
==0); lCount++)
{
long lCount2 =0;
printf(".");
while ((lCount2++ < 100) && (iSrqOccurred ==0))
{
YIELD;
}
}
printf("\n");
}
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
/*Interrupt handler,trigger event handler */
ViStatus _VI_FUNCH mySrqHdlr(ViSession viESA, ViEventType eventType, ViEvent
ctx,ViAddr userHdlr)
{
ViUInt16 iStatusByte;
Chapter 3
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Status Register–Determine When a Measurement is Done
/* Make sure it is an SRQ event, ignore if stray event*/
if (eventType!=VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ)
{
printf ("\n Stray event type0x%1x\n",eventType);
/*Return successfully*/
return VI_SUCCESS;
}
/* When an interrupt occurs,determine which device generated the interrupt
(if an instrument other than the ESA generates the interrupt, simply report
"Instrument at GPIB Address xxx Has Generated an Interrupt").*/
printf ("\n\n SRQ event occurred!\n");
printf ("\n ... Original Device Session =%t\n",viESA);
/*Get the GPIB address of the insrument, which has interrupted*/
viQueryf(viESA,"SYST:COMM:GPIB:SELF:ADDR?\n","%t", cBuf);
printf ("\n Instrument at GPIB address%s has generated an interrupt!\n",cBuf);
/*Get the status byte*/
/* If the ESA generated the interrupt, determine the nature of the interrupt;
did the measurement complete or an error message occur?*/
viQueryf(viESA, "*ESR?\n", "%d", &iStatusByte);
if ( (0x01 & iStatusByte))
printf("\n SRQ message:\t Measurement complete\n");
else if ( (0x02 | 0x10 | 0x20 & iStatusByte ))
printf ("\n SRQ message:\t Error Message Occurred\n");
/*Return successfully*/
iSrqOccurred =1;
viReadSTB(viESA,&iStatusByte);
return VI_SUCCESS;
}
/* Main Program*/
void main()
{
/*Program Variables*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
long lOpc=0;
/* Open a GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
int address =18;
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
152
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Status Register–Determine When a Measurement is Done
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Clear the status byte of the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*CLS\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t Status Register - Determine When a Measurement is Done \n\n" );
/*Put the analyzer in a single sweep*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz-signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Set the analyzer to 50MHz center frequency*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT 50 MHz\n");
/*Set the analyzer resolution bandwidth to 300 Khz*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:BAND:RES 300 KHz\n");
/*Set the analyzer to 10MHz span*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10MHz\n");
/*Trigger a sweep*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM\n");
/*Make sure the previous command has been completed*/
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! error ocurred: last command was not completed!\n");
exit(0);
}
/* Set the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement
is completed or an error message has occurred.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*SRE 96\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"*ESE 35\n");
/* Configure the computer to respond to an interrupt*/
Chapter 3
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Status Register–Determine When a Measurement is Done
/*install the handler and enable it */
viInstallHandler(viESA, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, mySrqHdlr,iAddress);
viEnableEvent(viESA, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ,VI_HNDLR,VI_NULL);
/*Send an undefined command to the device*/
viPrintf(viESA,"IDN\n");
/*Wait for SRQ */
WaitForSRQ();
/* Pause 5 seconds to observe error message displayed on ESA*/
Sleep(5000);
/*Averaging the successive measurements, Set video averaging to 80 sweeps,
/*Turn the avarage On*/
viPrintf(viESA,":SENS:AVER:TYPE LPOW;:SENS:AVER:COUN 80;:SENS:AVER:STAT ON\n");
/* Set the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement
is completed or an error message has occurred.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*SRE 96\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"*ESE 35\n");
/*Trigger the sweeps and set the *OPC bit after the sweeps are completed*/
viPrintf(viESA,":INIT:IMM;*OPC\n");
/*Wait for SRQ */
WaitForSRQ();
/*Disable and uninstall the interrupt handler*/
viDisableEvent (viESA, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ,VI_HNDLR);
viUninstallHandler(viESA, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, mySrqHdlr,iAddress);
/*Clear the instrument status register*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*SRE 0 \n");
/*Clear the status byte of the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*CLS\n");
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
154
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Determine if an Error has Occurred
Determine if an Error has Occurred
/************************************************************/
/* Determine if an error has occurred
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/*
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/* *RST
*CLS
/* - Sets the service request mask to assert SRQ when
/* either a measurement is uncalibrated or an error
/* message has occurred.
/*
/*
/*
/*
STAT:QUES:ENAB 512
STAT:QUES:INT:ENAB 8
*ESE 35
*SRE 104
/* - Set the center frequency to 500MHz and span to 100MHz */
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:CENT 500 MHZ
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 100 MHZ
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Set the analyzer to an uncalibrated state
/* - When an interrupt occurs, poll all instruments
/* - Report the nature of the interrupt on the ESA analyzer */
/* - Pause 5 seconds to observe the analyzer
/* - Sets the service request mask to assert SRQ when
/* either a measurement is uncalibrated or an error
/* message has occurred.
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
*ESE 35
*SRE 96
/* - Send an illegal command to the ESA
/* IDN (illegal command)
/* - When an interrupt occurs, poll all instruments
/* - Report the nature of the interrupt on the ESA analyzer */
/* - Clear the analyzer status registers
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
/*
*SRE 0
*ESE 0
STAT:QUES:ENAB 0
Chapter 3
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Determine if an Error has Occurred
/*
/*
STAT:QUES:INT:ENAB 0
*CLS
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Continue monitoring for an interrupt
/* - Close the session
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <windows.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#define hpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
#define YIELD Sleep(10)
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
cIdBuff[256] = {0};
char cEnter =0;
int
int
iResult =0;
iSrqOccurred = 0;
char cBuf[3]={0};
/*Wait until SRQ is generated and for the handler to be called. Print
something while waiting. When interrupt occurs it will be handled by
interrupt handler*/
void WaitForSRQ()
{
long lCount = 0L;
iSrqOccurred
=0;
printf ("\t\nWaiting for an SRQ to be generated ...");
for (lCount =0;(lCount<10) && (iSrqOccurred
==0); lCount++)
{
long lCount2 =0;
printf(".");
while ((lCount2++ < 100) && (iSrqOccurred ==0))
{
YIELD;
}
156
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Determine if an Error has Occurred
}
printf("\n");
}
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
/*Interrupt handler,trigger event handler */
ViStatus _VI_FUNCH sSrqHdlr(ViSession viESA, ViEventType eventType, ViEvent
ctx,ViAddr userHdlr)
{
ViUInt16 iStatusByte=0;
long lCond = 0L;
/* Make sure it is an SRQ event, ignore if stray event*/
if (eventType!=VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ)
{
printf ("\n Stray event type0x%1x\n",eventType);
/*Return successfully*/
return VI_SUCCESS;
}
Chapter 3
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Determine if an Error has Occurred
/* When an interrupt occurs, determine which device generated the interrupt
(if an instrument other than the ESA generates the interrupt, simply report
"Instrument at GPIB Address xxx Has Generated an Interrupt").*/
printf ("\n SRQ Event Occurred!\n");
printf ("\n ... Original Device Session =%1d\n",viESA);
/*Get the GPIB address of the insrument, which has interrupted*/
viQueryf(viESA,"SYST:COMM:GPIB:SELF:ADDR?\n","%t", cBuf);
printf ("\n Instrument at GPIB Address%s Has Generated an Interrupt!\n",cBuf);
/*Get the status byte*/
/* If the ESA generated the interrupt, determine the nature of the interrupt
either a measurement is uncalibrated or an error message has occurred?*/
viQueryf(viESA, "STAT:QUES:INT:EVEN?\n", "%d", &iStatusByte);
if ( (0x08 & iStatusByte))
printf("\n SRQ message:\t Measurement uncalibrated\n");
/* If the ESA generated the interrupt, determine the nature of the interrupt;
did is the measurement complete or an error message occur?*/
viQueryf(viESA, "*ESR?\n", "%d", &iStatusByte);
if ( (iStatusByte !=0) && (0x01 & iStatusByte))
printf("\n SRQ message:\t Measurement complete\n");
else if ( (iStatusByte !=0) && (0x02 | 0x10 | 0x20 & iStatusByte ))
printf ("\n SRQ message:\t Error Message Occurred\n");
/*Return successfully*/
iSrqOccurred =1;
viReadSTB(viESA, &iStatusByte);
return VI_SUCCESS;
}
void main()
{
/*Program Variables*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
long
int
lOpc= 0L;
iIntNum= 0;
long lCount= 0L;
/* Open a GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
158
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Determine if an Error has Occurred
}
/*Clear the instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Clear the status byte of the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*CLS\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Status register - Determine if an Error has Occurred\n\n" );
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz-signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Put the analyzer in single sweep*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/*Set the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement
is uncalibrated (i.e. "Meas Uncal" displayed on screen) or an error
message has occurred.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"STAT:QUES:ENAB 512\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"STAT:QUES:INT:ENAB 8\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"*ESE 35\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"*SRE 104\n");
/*Configure the computer to respond to an interrupt,install the handler
and enable it */
viInstallHandler(viESA, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, sSrqHdlr,ViAddr(10));
viEnableEvent(viESA, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ,VI_HNDLR,VI_NULL);
iSrqOccurred
=0;
/*Set the analyzer to a 500 MHz center frequency*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT 500 MHZ \n");
/*Set the analyzer to a 100 MHz span*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 100 MHZ\n");
/*Set the analyzer to a auto resolution BW*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:BAND:RES:AUTO 1\n");
/*Set the analyzer to a Auto Sweep Time*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:SWE:TIME:AUTO 1\n");
/*Allow analyzer to sweep several times.*/
Chapter 3
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Determine if an Error has Occurred
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 1 \n");
/*Manually couple sweeptime to 5ms. reduce resolution BW to 30 KHz.
"Meas Uncal" should be displayed on the screen, and an interrupt should
be generated.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:SWE:TIME 5 ms \n");
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:BAND:RES 30 KHZ \n");
/*Wait for SRQ*/
WaitForSRQ();
/*Pause for 5 seconds to observe "Meas Uncal" message on ESA display*/
Sleep(5000);
/* Set the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement
is completed or an error message has occurred.*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*SRE 96\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"*ESE 35\n");
/*Send an undefined command to the device*/
viPrintf(viESA,"IDN\n");
/*Wait for SRQ*/
WaitForSRQ();
/*Disable and uninstall the interrupt handler*/
viDisableEvent (viESA, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ,VI_HNDLR);
viUninstallHandler(viESA, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, sSrqHdlr,ViAddr(10));
/*Clear the instrument status register*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*SRE 0 \n");
viPrintf(viESA,"*ESE 0 \n");
viPrintf(viESA,"STAT:QUES:ENAB 0\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"STAT:QUES:INT:ENAB 0\n");
/*Clear the status byte of the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*CLS\n");
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
160
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
/************************************************************/
/* Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB session at address 18
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/*
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/* *RST
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz reference
/* CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
/* - Set the analyzer center frequency to the fundamental */
/* SENS:FREQ:CENT freq
/* - Set the analyzer to 10 MHz span
/* SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10 MHZ
/* - Set the analyzer to single sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT 0
/* - Take a sweep and wait for sweep completion
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Perform the peak search
/* CALC:MARK:MAX
/* - Set the marker to reference level
/* CALC:MARK:SET:RLEV
/* - Take a sweep and wait for sweep completion
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Perform the peak search
/* CALC:MARK:MAX
*CLS
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Change VISA timeout to 60 seconds
/* - Activate signal track
/*
/* - Perform narrow span and wait
/* SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10e4
/* - Check for operation complete
/* *OPC?
/* - De-activate signal track
CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT ON
/*
CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT OFF
Chapter 3
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
/* - Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds
/* - Set units to dBm
/* UNIT:POW DBM
/* - Take a sweep and wait for sweep completion
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
INIT:IMM;
*OPC?
/* - Perform the peak search
/* CALC:MARK:MAX
/* - Read the marker amplitude,this is the fundamental Level*/
/* CALC:MARK:Y?
/* - Change the amplitude units to volts
/* UNIT:POW V
/* - Take a sweep
/* INIT:IMM
/* - Check for operation complete
/* *OPC?
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Read the marker amplitude in volts, this is the
/* fundamental amplitude in volts.
/*
/* - Read the marker frequency
/* CALC:MARK:X?
/* - Measure each harmonic amplitude as follows:
CALC:MARK:Y?
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Set the span to 20 MHz
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 20 MHZ
Set the center frequency to the desired harmonic
SENS:FREQ:CENT <freq>
Take a sweep and wait for operation complete
INIT:IMM
*OPC?
Perform peak search
CALC:MARK:MAX
Set VISA timeout to 60 seconds
Activate signal track
CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT ON
Zoom down to a 100 kHz span
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10E4
Take a sweep and wait for operation complete
INIT:IMM
*OPC?
Signal track off
CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT OFF
Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds
Perform Peak Search
CALC:MARK:MAX
Set marker amplitude in volts
UNIT:POW V
162
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Query, read the marker amplitude in volts
CALC:MARK:Y?
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
Change the amplitude units to dBm and read the
marker amplitude.
UNIT:POW DBM
/* - Calculate the relative amplitude of each harmonic
/* reletive to the fundamental
/* - Calculate the total harmonic distortion
/* - Display the fundamental amplitude in dBm, fundamental */
/* frequency in MHz, relative amplitude of each harmonic */
/* in dBc and total harmonic distortion in percent
/* - Close the session
*/
*/
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "visa.h"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#definehpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char
int
cIdBuff[256]= {0};
cEnter = 0;
iResult = 0;
long
lOpc =0L;
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B, and E7401A*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
Chapter 3
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
}
void TakeSweep()
{
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM\n");
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! Error occurred: last command was not completed! \n");
exit(0);
}
}
void main()
{
/*Program Variables*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
double dFundamental = 0.0;
double dHarmFreq =0.0;
float fHarmV[10] ={0.0};
float fHarmDbm[10]={0.0};
float fRelAmptd[10]={0.0};
float fFundaAmptdDbm=0.0;
double dFundaAmptdV=0.0;
double dMarkerFreq = 0.0;
double dPrcntDistort =0.0;
double dSumSquare =0.0;
long lMaxHarmonic =0L;
long lNum=0L;
/*Setting default values*/
lMaxHarmonic =5;
dFundamental =50.0;
164
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
/* Open a GPIB session at address 18*/
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus=viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Harmonic Distortion Program \n\n" );
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz-signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Prompt user for fundamental frequency*/
printf("\t Enter the input signal fundamental frequency in MHz ");
/*The user enters fundamental frequency*/
scanf("%lf",&dFundamental);
/*Set the analyzer center frequency to the fundamental frequency. */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT%lf MHZ \n;",dFundamental);
/*Set the analyzer to 10MHz Span */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10 MHZ\n");
/*Put the analyzer in a single sweep */
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0 \n");
/*Trigger a sweep, wait for sweep completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/*Perform a peak search */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX \n");
/* Place the signal at the reference level using the
marker-to-reference level command and take sweep */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:SET:RLEV \n");
/*Trigger a sweep, wait for sweep completion*/
Chapter 3
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/*Perform a peak search */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX \n");
/*increase timeout to 60 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,60000);
/*Perform activate signal track */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT ON \n");
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
TakeSweep();
/*Perform narrow span and wait */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10e4 \n");
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
TakeSweep();
/*De activate the signal track */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT OFF \n");
/*Reset timeout to 3 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,3000);
/*Set units to DBM*/
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW DBM \n");
/*Perform a peak search */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX \n");
/*Read the marker amplitude, this is the fundamental amplitude
in dBm */
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%1f", &fFundaAmptdDbm);
/*Change the amplitude units to Volts */
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW V \n");
/*Read the marker amplitude in volts, This is the fundamental amplitude
in Volts (necessary for the THD calculation).*/
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%lf",&dFundaAmptdV);
/*Read the marker frequency. */
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:X? \n","%lf",&dMarkerFreq);
dFundamental = dMarkerFreq;
166
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
/*Measure each harmonic amplitude as follows: */
for ( lNum=2;lNum<=lMaxHarmonic;lNum++)
{
/*Measuring the Harmonic No#[%d] message */
printf("\n\t Measuring the Harmonic No [%d] \n",lNum );
/*Set the span to 20 MHz*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 20 MHZ \n");
/*Set the center frequency to the nominal harmonic frequency*/
dHarmFreq = lNum*dFundamental;
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT%lf HZ \n;",dHarmFreq);
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
TakeSweep();
/*Perform a peak search and wait for completion */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX\n");
/*increase timeout to 60 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,60000);
/*Activate signal track */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT ON\n");
/*Zoom down to a 100 kHz span */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10e4\n");
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
TakeSweep();
/* Signal track off */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT OFF\n");
/*Reset timeout to 3 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,3000);
/*Set Marker Amplitude in Volts*/
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW V\n");
/*Perform a peak search and wait for completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX\n");
/*Query and read the Marker Amplitude in Volts*/
/*Store the result in the array.*/
Chapter 3
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (GPIB)
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%1f", &fHarmV[lNum]);
/*Change the amplitude units to DBM */
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW DBM\n");
/* Read the marker amplitude */
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%1f", &fHarmDbm[lNum]);
}
/*Sum the square of each element in the fHarmV array. Then
calculate the relative amplitude of each harmonic relative
to the fundamental */
for (lNum=2;lNum<=lMaxHarmonic;lNum++)
{
dSumSquare= dSumSquare + (pow (double(fHarmV[lNum]) ,2.0));
/* Relative Amplitude */
fRelAmptd[lNum] = fHarmDbm[lNum] - fFundaAmptdDbm ;
}
/*Calculate the total harmonic distortion by dividing the square root of
the sum of the squares (dSumSquare) by the fundamental amplitude in Volts
(dFundaAmptdV).Multiply this value by 100 to obtain a result in percent*/
dPrcntDistort = ((sqrt(double (dSumSquare))) /dFundaAmptdV) *100 ;
/*Fundamental amplitude in dBm */
printf("\n\t Fundamental Amplitude:%lf dB \n\n",fFundaAmptdDbm);
/*Fundamental Frequency in MHz*/
printf("\t Fundamental Frequency is:%lf MHz \n\n",dFundamental/10e5);
/*Relative amplitude of each harmonic in dBc*/
for (lNum=2;lNum<=lMaxHarmonic;lNum++)
printf("\t Relative amplitude of Harmonic[%d]:%lf dBc
\n\n",lNum,fRelAmptd[lNum]);
/*Total harmonic distortion in percent*/
printf("\t Total Harmonic Distortion:%lf percent \n\n",dPrcntDistort);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
168
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
/************************************************************/
/* Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers
/* and E740xA EMC Analyzers.
/*
/* This C programming example does the following.
/* The SCPI instrument commands used are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens an RS-232 session to the COM1 serial port
/* - Clears the Analyzer
/*
/* - Resets the Analyzer
/* *RST
/* - Set the input port to the 50 MHz reference
/* CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
/* - Set the analyzer center frequency to the fundamental */
/* SENS:FREQ:CENT freq
/* - Set the analyzer to 10 MHz span
/* SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10 MHZ
/* - Set the analyzer to single sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT 0
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Perform the peak search
/* CALC:MARK:MAX
/* - Set the marker to reference level
/* CALC:MARK:SET:RLEV
/* - Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion
/* INIT:IMM;*WAI
/* - Perform the peak search
/* CALC:MARK:MAX
*CLS
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Change VISA timeout to 60 seconds
/* - Activate signal track
/*
/* - Perform narrow span and wait
/* SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10e4
/* - Check for operation complete
/* *OPC?
/* - De-activate signal track
CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT ON
/*
CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT OFF
Chapter 3
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
/* - Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds
/* - Set units to dBm
/* UNIT:POW DBM
/* - Take a sweep and wait for sweep completion
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
INIT:IMM;
*OPC?
/* - Perform the peak search
/* CALC:MARK:MAX
/* - Read the marker amplitude,this is the fundamental Level*/
/* CALC:MARK:Y?
/* - Change the amplitude units to volts
/* UNIT:POW V
/* - Take a sweep
/* INIT:IMM
/* - Check for operation complete
/* *OPC?
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Read the marker amplitude in volts, this is the
/* fundamental amplitude in volts.
/*
/* - Read the marker frequency
/* CALC:MARK:X?
/* - Measure each harmonic amplitude as follows:
CALC:MARK:Y?
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Set the span to 20 MHz
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 20 MHZ
Set the center frequency to the desired harmonic
SENS:FREQ:CENT <freq>
Take a sweep and wait for operation complete
INIT:IMM
*OPC?
Perform peak search
CALC:MARK:MAX
Set VISA timeout to 60 seconds
Activate signal track
CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT ON
Zoom down to a 100 kHz span
SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10E4
Take a sweep and wait for operation complete
INIT:IMM
*OPC?
Signal track off
CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT OFF
Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds
Perform Peak Search
CALC:MARK:MAX
Set marker amplitude in volts
UNIT:POW V
170
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Query, read the marker amplitude in volts
CALC:MARK:Y?
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
Change the amplitude units to dBm and read the
marker amplitude.
UNIT:POW DBM
/* - Calculate the relative amplitude of each harmonic
/* reletive to the fundamental
/* - Calculate the total harmonic distortion
/* - Display the fundamental amplitude in dBm, fundamental */
/* frequency in MHz, relative amplitude of each harmonic */
/* in dBc and total harmonic distortion in percent
/* - Close the session
*/
*/
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <conio.h>
#include <ctype.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <visa.h>
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#definehpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
ViStatus errStatus;
ViChar
char
int
cIdBuff[256]= {0};
cEnter = 0;
iResult = 0;
long
lOpc =0L ;
/*Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference*/
void Route50MHzSignal()
{
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cIdBuff);
iResult = (strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cIdBuff, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cIdBuff,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4411B, E4401B*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON\n");
Chapter 3
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON\n");
}
}
void TakeSweep()
{
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM\n");
viQueryf(viESA, "*OPC?\n", "%d", &lOpc);
if (!lOpc)
{
printf("Program Abort! Error occurred: last command was not completed! \n");
exit(0);
}
}
void main()
{
/*Program Variables*/
ViStatus viStatus = 0;
double dFundamental = 0.0;
double dHarmFreq = 0.0;
float fHarmV[10] ={0.0};
float fHarmDbm[10]={0.0};
float fRelAmptd[10]={0.0};
float fFundaAmptdDbm=0.0;
double dFundaAmptdV=0.0;
double dMarkerFreq = 0.0;
double dPrcntDistort =0.0;
double dSumSquare =0.0;
long lMaxHarmonic =0L;
long lNum=0L;
/*Setting default values*/
lMaxHarmonic =5;
172
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
dFundamental =50.0;
/* Open a serial session at COM1 */
viStatus=viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
if (viStatus =viOpen(defaultRM,"ASRL1::INSTR",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA) !=
VI_SUCCESS)
{
printf("Could not open a session to ASRL device at COM1!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the instrument*/
viClear(viESA);
/*Reset the instrument*/
viPrintf(viESA,"*RST\n");
/*Display the program heading */
printf("\n\t\t Harmonic Distortion Program \n\n" );
/* Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz-signal accordingly*/
Route50MHzSignal();
/*Prompt user for fundamental frequency*/
printf("\t Enter the input signal fundamental frequency in MHz ");
/*The user enters fundamental frequency*/
scanf("%lf",&dFundamental);
/*Set the analyzer center frequency to the fundamental frequency. */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT%lf MHZ\n",dFundamental);
/*Set the analyzer to 10MHz Span */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10 MHZ\n");
/*Put the analyzer in a single sweep mode */
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:CONT 0\n");
/*Trigger a sweep, wait for sweep completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/*Perform a peak search */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX\n");
/* Place the signal at the reference level using the
marker-to-reference level command and take sweep */
Chapter 3
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:SET:RLEV\n");
/*Trigger a sweep, wait for sweep completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
/*Perform a peak search */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX\n");
/*Increase timeout to 60 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,60000);
/*Perform activate signal track */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT ON\n");
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
TakeSweep();
/*Perform narrow span and wait */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10e4\n");
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
TakeSweep();
/*De activate the signal track */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT OFF\n");
/*Reset timeout to 3 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,3000);
/*Set units to dBm*/
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW DBM\n");
/*Perform a peak search */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX\n");
/*Read the marker amplitude, this is the fundamental amplitude
in dBm */
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%1f", &fFundaAmptdDbm);
/*Change the amplitude units to Volts */
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW V\n");
/*Read the marker amplitude in volts, This is the fundamental amplitude
in Volts (necessary for the THD calculation).*/
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%lf",&dFundaAmptdV);
174
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
/*Read the marker frequency. */
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:X? \n","%lf",&dMarkerFreq);
dFundamental = dMarkerFreq;
/*Measure each harmonic amplitude as follows: */
for ( lNum=2;lNum<=lMaxHarmonic;lNum++)
{
/*Measuring the Harmonic No#[%d] message */
printf("\n\t Measuring the Harmonic No [%d] \n",lNum );
/*Set the span to 20 MHz*/
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 20 MHZ\n");
/*Set the center frequency to the nominal harmonic frquency*/
dHarmFreq = lNum * dFundamental;
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:CENT%lf HZ\n",dHarmFreq);
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
TakeSweep();
/*Perform a peak search and wait for completion */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX\n");
/*Increase timeout to 60 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,60000);
/*Activate signal track */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT ON\n");
/*Zoom down to a 100 KHz span */
viPrintf(viESA,"SENS:FREQ:SPAN 10e4\n");
/*Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion*/
TakeSweep();
/* Signal track off */
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:TRCK:STAT OFF\n");
/*Reset timeout to 3 sec*/
viSetAttribute(viESA,VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE,3000);
/*Set marker amplitude in Volts*/
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW V\n");
/*Perform a peak search and wait for completion*/
viPrintf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:MAX\n");
Chapter 3
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Measuring Harmonic Distortion (RS-232)
/*Query and read the marker amplitude in Volts*/
/*Store the result in the fHarmV array.*/
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%1f", &fHarmV[lNum]);
/*Change the amplitude units to dBm */
viPrintf(viESA,"UNIT:POW DBM\n");
/* Read the marker amplitude */
viQueryf(viESA,"CALC:MARK:Y?\n","%1f", &fHarmDbm[lNum]);
}
/*Sum the square of each element in the fHarmV array and calculate
the relative amplitude of each harmonic relative to the fundamental*/
for (lNum=2;lNum<=lMaxHarmonic;lNum++)
{
dSumSquare= dSumSquare + (pow (double(fHarmV[lNum]) ,2.0));
/* Relative Amplitude */
fRelAmptd[lNum] = fHarmDbm[lNum] - fFundaAmptdDbm ;
}
/*Calculate the total harmonic distortion by dividing the square root of
the sum of the squares (dSumSquare) by the fundamental amplitude in Volts
(dFundaAmptdV).Multiply this value by 100 to obtain a result in percent*/
dPrcntDistort = ((sqrt(double (dSumSquare))) /dFundaAmptdV) *100 ;
/*Fundamental amplitude in dBm */
printf("\nFundamental Amplitude:%lf dB \n",fFundaAmptdDbm);
/*Fundamental frequency in MHz*/
printf("Fundamental Frequency is:%lf MHz \n",dFundamental/10e5);
/*Relative amplitude of each harmonic in dBc*/
for (lNum=2;lNum<=lMaxHarmonic;lNum++)
printf("Relative amplitude of Harmonic[%d]:%lf dBc
\n",lNum,fRelAmptd[lNum]);
/*Total harmonic distortion in percent*/
printf("Total Harmonic Distortion:%lf percent\n",dPrcntDistort);
/*Close the session*/
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
}
176
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements)
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements)
/************************************************************/
/* Average.c Agilent Technologies 1999
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/* This C programming example does the following:
/* Performs Power Averaging of Multiple ESA Measurements
/* and Writes the Result back to a Trace for display
/*
/* The required SCPI instrument commands are given as
/* reference.
/*
/* - Opens a GPIB device at address 18
/* - Clears and Resets the Analyzer to a known state
/*
/*
SYST:PRES:TYPE FACT
*RST
/* - Identify the Instrument model
/* *IDN?
/* - Sets the analyzer center frequency and span
/*
/*
SENS:FREQ:CENT freq
SENS:FREQ:SPAN freq
/* - Sets the analyzer resolution bandwidth
/* SENS:BAND rbw
/* - Selects sampled as the detector mode
/* SENS:DET SAMP
/* - Disable optional Input/Output functions
/* :SYST:PORT:IFVS:ENAB OFF
/* - Turn off auto-alignment
/* CAL:AUTO OFF
/* - Select the desired number of sweep points
/* SWE:POINTS points
/* - Select the appropriate display reference level and
/* amplitude reference routing
/* E4402B/03B/04B/05B/07B/08B or E7402A/03A/04A/05A
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/*
/*
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -20 DBM
CAL:SOUR:STAT ON
/* E4401B, E4411B, or E7401A
/*
/*
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -25 DBM
CAL:SOUR:STAT ON;
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Select single sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT OFF
/* - Disable local display
/* DISP:ENAB OFF
/* - Select internal machine binary data format (milli-dBm) */
Chapter 3
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements)
/*
/* - Select appropriate byte order (Intel)
/* FORM:BORD SWAP
FORM:DAT INT,32
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
/* - Repeat the following the requested number of times:
/* - Trigger a measurement and wait for completion
/*
/* - Read the resulting measurement trace
/* TRAC:DATA? TRACE1
INIT:*OPC?
/* - Compute running averaged power at all trace points
/* - Display measurement statistics
/* - Write averaged data to second trace display
/*
/* - Enable viewing of second trace
/* TRACE2:MODE VIEW
/* - Enable local display for viewing
/* DISP:ENAB ON
/* - Select continuous sweep mode
/* INIT:CONT ON
TRAC:DATA TRACE2 <definite length block of data>
/* - Close session and Return instrument to local control */
/************************************************************/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <math.h>
#include <sys\timeb.h>
#include <visa.h>
#define hpESA_IDN_E4401B "Hewlett-Packard, E4401B"
#define hpESA_IDN_E4411B "Hewlett-Packard, E4411B"
#define hpEMC_IDN_E7401A "Hewlett-Packard, E7401A"
#define NUM_TRACES 100
*/
/* number of traces to average
#define NUM_POINTS 401
*/
/* requested number of points/trace
/* center frequency in MHz, an integer
#define CENTER 50
*/
#define SPAN 20
#define RBW 300
/* span frequency in MHz, an integer
/* resolution BW in kHz, an integer
*/
*/
#define DISPLAY 0
*/
/* ESA display enable, disable for speed
#define DATA_LENGTH
*/
4 /* number of data bytes in one trace point
/* maximum number of points/trace in ESA
#define MAX_POINTS 8192
178
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements)
*/
int iNumTraces = NUM_TRACES,/* number of traces to average
*/
iRbw = RBW,
/* resolution bandwidth
*/
*/
iNumPoints = NUM_POINTS,/* actual number of trace points per sweep
*/
*/
iSpan = SPAN,
/* Analyzer Frequency Span in MHz
/* Analyzer Center frequency in MHz
iCenter = CENTER;
int iResult =0;
unsigned long lRetCount; /* the number of bytes transferred in one trace record
*/
double dDelta, dTimePer, dPower;
struct timeb start_time, stop_time, elapsed_time;
char cCommand[100];
char cBuffer[100];
char cEnter;
double dPwrAvgArray[MAX_POINTS];
ViUInt32 iHeaderLength,
*/
/* header is "#nyyy..." n is number of chars in yyy,
/* yyy is the total data length in bytes
/* iArrayLength is number of bytes of data
*/
iArrayLength,
*/
iTermLength = 1, /* the response message includes a LF character
*/
*/
*/
iBlockSize,
/* number of bytes expected in one trace definite block
/* total number of bytes actually transferred
iTotalRetCount;
ViSession defaultRM, viESA;
/* reserve space for the header, data and terminator */
ViChar cInBuffer[sizeof("#nyyyyl") + (MAX_POINTS * DATA_LENGTH) ];
ViChar cOutBuffer[sizeof("TRAC:DATA TRACE2,#nyyyyl") + (MAX_POINTS * DATA_LENGTH
) ];
/****************** Calculate length byte in block header
***********************/
int HeaderLength(int iArrayLength)
int iHeaderLength;
{
Chapter 3
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements)
iHeaderLength = 3; /* iArrayLength >0 plus increment for "#" and "n"
*/
while ( (iArrayLength = (iArrayLength / 10)) > 0 )
{
iHeaderLength++;
}
return(iHeaderLength);
}
/*******************
prepare ESA for measurement
************************/
void setup() {
viPrintf(viESA, ":SENS:FREQ:CENT%i MHz\n", iCenter);
viPrintf(viESA,":SENS:FREQ:SPAN%i MHZ\n", iSpan);
viPrintf(viESA, ":SENS:BAND%i KHZ\n", iRbw);
/* use the sampling detector for power-average calculations
viPrintf(viESA, ":DET SAMP\n");
*/
/* Turn off analog output of option board to maximize measurement rate */
viPrintf(viESA, ":SYST:PORT:IFVS:ENAB OFF\n");
/* Turn auto align off to maximize measurement rate
viPrintf(viESA, ":CAL:AUTO OFF\n");
*/
*/
/* set requested number of points
viPrintf(viESA, ":SWE:POINTS%i\n", NUM_POINTS);
printf("This program will measure and calculate\n");
printf ("the power average of%i%i-point
traces.\n",iNumTraces,iNumPoints);
/* Turn on 50 MHz amplitude reference signal
viPrintf(viESA, ":CAL:SOUR:STAT ON\n");
*/
/* Identify the instrument and get the model number
viQueryf(viESA, "*IDN?\n", "%t", &cBuffer);
*/
iResult = (strncmp( cBuffer, hpESA_IDN_E4401B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4401B)) &&
strncmp( cBuffer, hpESA_IDN_E4411B, strlen(hpESA_IDN_E4411B)) && strncmp( cBuffer,
hpEMC_IDN_E7401A, strlen(hpEMC_IDN_E7401A)));
if( iResult == 0 )
{
/*Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models*/
/*E4401B, E4411B and E7401A*/
180
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements)
viPrintf(viESA,":DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -25 DBM\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
else
{
/* For the analyzers having frequency limits >= 3GHz, prompt the user*/
/* to connect the amplitude reference output to the input*/
printf ("Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT \n");
printf ("......Press Return to continue \n");
scanf( "%c",&cEnter);
/*Externally route the 50MHz Signal*/
viPrintf(viESA, ":DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -20 DBM\n");
viPrintf(viESA,"CAL:SOUR:STAT ON \n");
}
/* Single sweep mode
*/
*/
viPrintf(viESA, ":INIT:CONT OFF\n");
/* Turn off the local display to maximize measurement rate
if(!DISPLAY)
{
viPrintf(viESA, ":DISP:ENAB OFF\n");
}
/* transfer data in definite length,32 bit integer blocks. Select
/* machine units (milli-dBm) to maximize measurement rate
viPrintf(viESA, ":FORM:DATA INT,32\n" );
*/
*/
/* select the byte order; low-byte first for Intel platforms
/* To further increase measurement rate,:FORM:BORD NORM could
/* be used instead. The byte ordering would then need to be
/* done within this program.
*/
*/
*/
*/
viPrintf(viESA, ":FORM:BORD SWAP\n");
/* pre-calculate amount of data to be transferred per measurement
iTermLength = 1;
*/
iArrayLength = iNumPoints * DATA_LENGTH;
iHeaderLength = HeaderLength(iArrayLength);
iBlockSize = iHeaderLength + iArrayLength + iTermLength;
}
/****************
Write binary trace data to ESA
*******************/
void write_binary_trace(char *cScpiCommand, int *ipTraceData) {
Chapter 3
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements)
/* trace data must point to an integer array of size NUM_POINTS
memcpy(&cOutBuffer[strlen(cScpiCommand)], ipTraceData, iArrayLength);
memcpy(&cOutBuffer, cScpiCommand, strlen(cScpiCommand));
*/
/* Add a <newline> to the end of the data, This isn’t necessary
/* if the GPIB card has been configured to assert EOI when the last
/* character is sent, but it ensures a valid iTermLength is provided.
cOutBuffer[iArrayLength + strlen(cScpiCommand)] = 0x0A;
*/
*/
*/
iBlockSize = (strlen(cScpiCommand) + iArrayLength + 1);
viWrite(viESA,(ViBuf) cOutBuffer, iBlockSize, &lRetCount );
}
/******* Measure and calculate power-average of multiple measurements
*********/
void average() {
int i=0, iLoop=0;
int iArray[NUM_POINTS];
long lOpc =0L;
double dLogTen = log(10.0);
setup();
iTotalRetCount = lRetCount = 0;
/* start the timer
*/
*/
ftime( &start_time );
/* Now run through the event loop iNumTraces times
for(i=0; i<iNumTraces; i++)
{
/* trigger a new measurement and wait for complete
viPrintf(viESA, ":INIT:IMM;*WAI\n");
*/
/* Read the trace data into a buffer
*/
viPrintf(viESA, ":TRAC:DATA? TRACE1\n");
viRead(viESA,(ViBuf) cInBuffer, (ViUInt32) iBlockSize, &lRetCount );
iTotalRetCount += lRetCount;
/* copy trace data to an array,
*/
*/
/* byte order swapping could be done here rather than in ESA
memcpy(iArray, &cInBuffer[iHeaderLength], iArrayLength);
/* calculate a running dPower-average
*/
*/
for(iLoop = 0; iLoop < NUM_POINTS; iLoop++) {
/* running average of dPower, in milliwatts
182
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements)
dPower = exp( dLogTen * (iArray[iLoop]/10000.0));
if(i > 0) {
dPwrAvgArray[iLoop] += ((dPower - dPwrAvgArray[iLoop])/(i+1));
}
else
{
dPwrAvgArray[iLoop] = dPower;
}
}
} /* end of event loop
*/
*/
/* stop the timer
ftime( &stop_time );
/* Calculate elapsed time
*/
if (start_time.millitm > stop_time.millitm) {
stop_time.millitm += 1000;
stop_time.time--;
}
elapsed_time.millitm = stop_time.millitm - start_time.millitm;
elapsed_time.time = stop_time.time - start_time.time;
/* This is measurement time in milliseconds
*/
*/
dDelta = (1000.0 * elapsed_time.time) + (elapsed_time.millitm);
/* show measurement statistics
dTimePer=dDelta/((float)iNumTraces);
printf("\tPower average of%i%i-point traces performed in%3.1f
seconds\n",iNumTraces,iNumPoints,dDelta/1000);
printf("\t%6.1f milliseconds per averaged measurement\n",dTimePer);
printf("\t%6.1f averaged measurements per second\n",1000.0/dTimePer);
printf("\t%i bytes transferred per trace,%i bytes total\n\n",lRetCount,
iTotalRetCount);
return;
}
/********************************
void main(void) {
Main
******************************/
int iLoop;
int iAvgArray[NUM_POINTS];
ViStatus viStatus;
/* Open a GPIB session at address 18
*/
viStatus = viOpenDefaultRM(&defaultRM);
viStatus = viOpen(defaultRM,"GPIB0::18",VI_NULL,VI_NULL,&viESA);
if(viStatus)
{
Chapter 3
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Examples
Making Faster Measurements (multiple measurements)
printf("Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18!\n");
exit(0);
}
/*Clear the Instrument
viClear(viESA);
*/
/* go to known instrument state with cleared status byte
viPrintf(viESA, ":SYST:PRES:TYPE FACT;*RST\n");
*/
/* measure, transfer and calculate power average of multiple traces
average();
*/
/* convert average power array back to integer array
*/
for (iLoop = 0; iLoop < iNumPoints; iLoop++)
{
dPower = 10.0 * log10( dPwrAvgArray[iLoop]);
iAvgArray[iLoop] = (int) (1000.0 * dPower);
}
/* build ’TRAC:DATA TRACE2,#nyyy’ header and write the result to Trace 2
sprintf(cCommand,":TRAC:DATA TRACE2,#%i%i", HeaderLength(iArrayLength)-2,
*/
iArrayLength);
write_binary_trace(cCommand, iAvgArray);
/* enable the trace, local display and return to continuous sweep
viPrintf(viESA,":TRACE2:MODE VIEW;:DISP:ENAB ON;:INIT:CONT ON\n");
*/
*/
/* Close session
viClose(viESA);
viClose(defaultRM);
} /***************************** End of Main *******************************/
184
Chapter3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Command Cross-References
Functional Index to SCPI Subsection
Functional Index to SCPI Subsection
The following table lists the SCPI subsections or subsystems associated with the
instrument function category you wish to perform. The commands listed that begin
with an asterisk (*) are IEEE common commands. These commands, and the SCPI
commands in the subsection or subsystem, are documented in Chapter 5,
Function Category
SCPI Subsection or Subsystem
ALIGNMENT
*CAL?
*TST?
:CALibration
:STATus:QUEStionable
ATTENUATOR
BANDWIDTH
see function category: Internal
Attenuation and Source
:CALCulate
:INITiate
:MEASure
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth
CONFIGURATION and STATUS
*RCL <register>
*SRE <integer>
*STB?
:SYSTem
CONTROL
:ABORt
CORRECTED MEASUREMENTS
COUPLING
[:SENSe]:CORRection
:COUPle
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth
DELETE, LOAD, OR SAVE
*SAV <register>
:MMEMory
DEMODULATION
DISPLAY
[:SENSe]:DEMod
:UNIT
EMI DIAGNOSTICS
EMI MEASUREMENTS
:MEASure
:MEASure
[:SENSe]:EMI
FREQUENCY
[:SENSe]:FREQuency
:STATus:QUEStionable
FREQUENCY SPAN
[:SENSe]:FREQuency
186
Chapter4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Command Cross-References
Functional Index to SCPI Subsection
Function Category
SCPI Subsection or Subsystem
INPUT and OUTPUT
:INPut
:OUTPut
[:SENSe]:AVERage
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth
[:SENSe]:CORRection
[:SENSe]:DEMod
[:SENSe]:DETector
[:SENSe]:POWer
[:SENSe]:SWEep
:STATus:QUEStionable
:UNIT
INTERNAL ATTENUATION and
SOURCE
:OUTPut
[:SENSe]:POWer
:SOURce
LIMIT LINES
:CALCulate:LLINe
:MMEMory
:TRACe
MARKER
:CALCulate:MARKer
MEASURE
:EMI
:INITiate
:MEASure
[:SENSe]:AVERage
[:SENSe]:POWer
[:SENSe]:SWEep
PRESET
*RST
:STATus
:SYSTem
PRINTING
:HCOPy
SIGNAL LIST
:CALCulate
:MEASure
SOURCE
SPAN
see function category: Internal
Attenuation and Source
see also functional category:
FREQUENCY SPAN
SPEAKER
SWEEP
:SYSTem
[:SENSe]:SWEep
:SOURce
SYNCHRONIZATION
*OPC?
*WAI
:SYSTem
Chapter 4
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Command Cross-References
Functional Index to SCPI Subsection
Function Category
SCPI Subsection or Subsystem
SYSTEM INFORMATION
*CLS
*ESE <number>
*IDN?
*ESR?
*LRN?
:STATus
:STATus:QUEStionable
:SYSTem
TRACE
:DISPlay
:FORMat
[:SENSe]:EBWidth
:TRACe
TRACE MATH
TRIGGER
:CALCulate:NTData
:DISPlay
:TRACe
*TRG
:ABORt
:INITiate
:TRIGger
188
Chapter4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
The first few pages of this chapter contain common commands specified in IEEE
Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common
Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
Following these commands, the Agilent EMC analyzers SCPI commands are
listed.
NOTE
presented in this chapter. In addition, refer to Chapter 6, “Front-Panel Key
Reference,” in the “Agilent EMC Analyzers User’s Guide” for additional
information about the operation of each analyzer function. Use the analyzer HELP
key to obtain similar information about analyzer key functions.
Refer to Chapter 6, “Agilent 8590/EMC Analyzers Programming Conversion
Guide” for specific backwards compatibility information between commands for
HP/Agilent 8590-Series spectrum analyzers and Agilent EMC analyzers.
190
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SCPI Sections and Subsections
SCPI Sections and Subsections
SCPI commands related to major functional areas (such as calculate or) are
grouped into blocks, or subsystems. Some of these subsystems are further divided
into subsections (such as calculate/marker, or sense/harmonics). An instrument
model is then created to represent the way in which instrument functionality is
viewed and categorized by SCPI. Refer to IEEE SCPI-1997 Volume 2: Command
Reference, Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments, Version 1997.0,
May, 1997 for a more complete description of the SCPI instrument model.
The SCPI subsystems in this chapter are listed in alphabetical order. Likewise, the
SCPI commands are in alphabetical order within the subsystem in which they
belong. Refer to the following table to locate SCPI command subsystems and
subsections by page number.
SCPI Subsystem/Subsection
Page
IEEE Common Commands
:ABORt
:CALCulate
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt
:CALCulate:LLINe
:CALCulate:MARKer
:CALCulate:NTData
:CALibration
:CONFigure (see :MEAS)
:COUPle
:DISPlay
:FETCh (see :MEASure)
:FORMat
:HCOPy
:INITiate
:INPut
:MEASure
:MMEMory
:OUTPut
Chapter 5
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SCPI Sections and Subsections
SCPI Subsystem/Subsection
Page
:READ (see :MEASure)
[:SENSe]:
[:SENSe]:AVERage
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth
[:SENSe]:CORRection
[:SENSe]:DEMod
[:SENSe]:DETector
[:SENSe]:EMI
[:SENSe]:FREQuency
[:SENSe]:POWer
[:SENSe]:SWEep
:SOURce
:STATus
:STATus:QUEStionable
:SYSTem
:TRACe
:TRIGger
:UNIT
192
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
IEEE Common Commands
IEEE Common Commands
These commands are specified in IEEE Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard
Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std
488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
Calibration Query
*CAL?
Performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the
alignment. A zero is returned if the alignment is successful. The SCPI equivalent
for this command is the same as :CALibrate[:ALL]?
NOTE
Before executing this command, connect a cable between front panel connector
AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent EMC analyzers
except Agilent model E7401A.
If the cable is not connected, CAL:ALLwill perform a subset of the RF alignment
and a subsequent CAL:RFwill be required for the analyzer to meet its specified
performance.
The query performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of
the alignment. A zero is returned if the alignment is successful, even if only a
subset of the RF alignment is performed.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align All Now
Clear Status
*CLS
Clears the status byte. It does this by emptying the error queue and clearing all bits
in all of the event registers. The status byte registers summarize the states of the
other registers. It is also responsible for generating service requests.
Remarks:
See *STB?
Standard Event Status Enable
*ESE <number>
*ESE?
Sets the bits in the standard event status enable register. This register monitors I/O
errors and synchronization conditions such as operation complete, request control,
query error, device dependent error, execution error, command error and power on.
A summary bit is generated on execution of the command.
Chapter 5
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
IEEE Common Commands
Query returns the state of the standard event status enable register.
Range:
Integer, 0 to 255
Standard Event Status Register Query
*ESR?
Queries and clears the standard event status event register. (This is a destructive
read.)
Range:
Integer, 0 to 255
Identification Query
*IDN?
Returns an instrument identification information string. The string will contain the
model number, serial number and firmware revision. The response is organized
into four fields separated by commas. The field definitions are as follows:
Manufacturer
Model
Serial number
Firmware version
Example:
Hewlett-Packard, E7402A, US39120213, A.06.00
NOTE
As shown in the example, the analyzer returns “Hewlett-Packard” as the
manufacturer even though it is now manufactured by Agilent Technologies. This is
intentional. Agilent Technologies was created out of the Hewlett-Packard
company, and the Hewlett-Packard name is retained to support those customers
who have purchased EMC analyzers in the past.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
Instrument State Query
*LRN?
Returns current instrument state data in a block of defined length. The information
is in a machine readable format only. Sending the query returns the following
format:
#PQQQSYST:SET #NMMM<state_data>
The following example is a response to *LRN?The actual sizes will vary depending on
the instrument state data size.
Example:
#42031SYST:SET #42016<state data>
194
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
IEEE Common Commands
The number 4 (P in the preceding query response format) means
there are 4 numbers that make up the size of the data that
follows. In this example, 2031 bytes will follow the number 4
(42031).
2031 and 2016 (QQQ and MMM in the preceding query
response format) represent data size in bytes.
The state can be changed by sending this block of data to the instrument after
removing the size information:
Example:
SYST:SET #NMMM<state_data>
Operation Complete
*OPC
*OPC?
Sets bit 0 in the standard event status register to “1” when all pending operations
have finished.
The query stops any new commands from being processed until the current
processing is complete. Then it returns a “1”, and the program continues. This
query can be used to synchronize events of other instruments on the external bus.
*OPCand *OPC?are currently effective only when immediately preceded by either
the :INITiate:IMMediateor a :CALibrationcommand.
Query Instrument Options
This function is provided in the analyzer SCPI language reference in the SYSTem
subsystem under :SYSTem:OPTions?.
Recall
*RCL <register>
This command recalls the instrument state from the specified instrument memory
register.
Range:
Registers are an integer, 0 to 127
Remarks:
See also commands :MMEMory:LOAD:STATeand
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
If the state being loaded has a newer firmware revision than the
revision of the instrument, no state is recalled and an error is
reported.
If the state being loaded has an equal firmware revision than the
revision of the instrument, the state will be loaded.
If the state being loaded has an older firmware revision than the
revision of the instrument, the instrument will only load the
parts of the state that apply to the older revision.
Chapter 5
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
IEEE Common Commands
Front Panel
Access:
File, Recall State
Reset
*RST
This command presets the instrument to a factory defined condition that is
appropriate for remote programming operation. *RSTis equivalent to performing
the two commands :SYSTem:PRESetand *CLS. This command always
performs a factory preset.
NOTE
The preset performed by *RSTis always a factory preset. That is, the same preset
performed by :SYSTem:PRESetwhen :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPEis set to
FACTory.
Front Panel
Access:
Preset
Save
*SAV <register>
This command saves the instrument state to the specified instrument memory
register.
Range:
Registers are an integer, 0 to 127
Remarks:
See also commands :MMEMory:LOAD:STATeand
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save State
Service Request Enable
*SRE <integer>
*SRE?
This command sets the value of the service request enable register.
The query returns the value of the register.
Range:
Integer, 0 to 255
Read Status Byte Query
*STB?
Returns the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents.
Remarks:
See *CLS
196
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
IEEE Common Commands
Trigger
*TRG
This command triggers the instrument. Use the
:TRIGger:SEQuence:SOURcecommand to select the trigger source.
Remarks: See also the :INITiate:IMMediatecommand
Self Test Query
*TST?
This query is used by some instruments for a self test.
For Agilent ESA analyzers, *TST?always returns 0; no tests are performed.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align All Now
Wait-to-Continue
*WAI
This command causes the instrument to wait until all pending commands are
completed before executing any additional commands. There is no query form to
the command.
Chapter 5
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
ABORt Subsystem
ABORt Subsystem
Abort
:ABORt
Restarts any sweep or measurement in progress and resets the sweep or trigger
system. A measurement refers to any of the measurements found in the MEASURE
menu.
If :INITiate:CONTinuousis off (single measure), then
:INITiate:IMMediatewill start a new single measurement.
If :INITiate:CONTinuousis on (continuous measure), a new continuous
measurement begins immediately.
The INITiate and TRIGger subsystems contain additional related commands.
Front Panel
Access:
Restart for continuous measurement mode
198
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem
This subsystem is used to perform post-acquisition data processing. In effect, the
collection of new data triggers the CALCulate subsystem. In this instrument, the
primary functions in this subsystem are markers and limits.
NdBpoints
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB?
Selects the power level, below the peak of the signal, at which the signal
bandwidth will be measured by the markers.
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]must be ON.
NOTE
To query the result of NdBpoints, use the command
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult?
Factory Preset
and *RST:
–3 dB
Range:
–80 dB to –1 dB
Default Unit:
Remarks:
dB
Refer to :CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]for an
explanation of this marker function.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), N dB Points
NdBresults
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult?
Returns the measured bandwidth at the power level defined by
:CALCulate:BWIDth:NDB. –100 is returned if
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] is off, or when a result is not
available. Refer to CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]for an
explanation of this marker function.
Range:
Real value less than the current frequency span
Hz
Default Unit:
Remarks:
When segmented sweep is on, a result will not be available
when the NDB marker crosses a segment boundary.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), N dB Points
Chapter 5
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate Subsystem
NdBstate
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]?
Controls the bandwidth measurement function. The function measures the
bandwidth, at the number of dB down specified in :CALCulate:BWIDth:NDB,
of the maximum signal on the display.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
When this command is turned on, the bandwidth measurement
function (N dB Points) is associated with the active marker. If
no marker is active at the time this command is turned on,
marker 1 becomes the active marker, and a peak search is
performed. No restrictions exist for moving the bandwidth
measurement function markers to any other signal on the
display. However, when this function is turned on, all other
concurrent marker functions are suspended.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), N dB Points On Off
Calculate Correction at Frequency
:CALCulate:CORRection:ATFREquency? <freq>
Calculates the total correction factor for a specified frequency point.
Example:
Remarks:
:CALC:CORR:ATFRE? 1.5E8
Refer to [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA
<freq>, <rel_ampl> {,<freq>, <rel_ampl}for an
explanation of correction factors.
Test Current Trace Data Against all Limit Lines
:CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL?
Queries the status of the limit line testing. Returns a 0 if the trace data passes when
compared with all the current limit lines. Returns a 1 if the trace data fails any limit
line test.
200
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt Subsection
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt Subsection
Add Measure to List
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD:MEASured
Adds results of most recent measure to marker list.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Front Panel
Access:
MEASURE, Meas to List
Add Marker to List
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD:MARKer [1]|2|3|4
Adds marker frequency and amplitude to signal list.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Front Panel
Access:
MEASURE, Marker to List
Append Signal Data to List
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD <string>
and
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:FETCH CURRent | <integer>
Adds data to signal list using the defined format. The string is a data string
formatted as a quote delimited string with comma separated fields.
Data Format
The string is a quoted delimited string with comma separated fields.
The meaning of a value is determined by its position in the data string. The data
format string is designed to allow complementary use between the ADD and
FETCH features. That is, the output of the FETCH command is directly usable as
input to the ADD command.
requires only a frequency and allows defaults, the data returned by the FETCH will
always return a fully formatted data string. See the field descriptions for allowed
values and formats.
Chapter 5
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt Subsection
The ADD command always appends signals to the end of the signal list. If the
Ta b le 5-1
Position
F ield Descr ip t ion Ta b le
ADD
ADD
Definition
Default
Required
Optional
1
2
3
4
5
6
Yes
Frequency
Peak Ampl
QPK Ampl
Avg Ampl
Uncertainty
Value required
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 (Peak detector flag off)
0 (Quasi-Peak detector flag off)
0 (Average amplitude flag off)
0 (Applied when measured)
0 (Applied when measured)
Total
Correction
7
8
Yes
Yes
Marked Status 0 (off)
Peak Det. Flag 0 (off) * Implicitly On if peak
amplitude provided
9
Yes
Yes
Yes
QPK Det. Flag 0 (off) * Implicitly On if QPk
amplitude provided
10
11
Avg Flag
0 (off) * Implicitly On if Avg amplitude
provided
Comment
Empty
ADD command fails (e.g. signal list at capacity), a message is placed on the status
line and in the error queue. An invalid data format places a message on the status
line and into the error queue.
Because all of the values may not be meaningful during the ADD process, the
ADD command allows defaults to be used. Because of this the data string
submitted may be abbreviated. Each ADD data format string must contain a valid
frequency string. The rule applied to ADD strings is that values need to be
provided only as far to the right as a non-default value is used.
For example, the data format to add a signal at 1 MHz can be indicated as a
frequency only. The two commands below are equivalent. The remaining fields are
set to their default values.
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD “1e6”or
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD “1000000”
If the frequency and a comment are desired, the missing fields between the
frequency and comment position must be shown by marking the positions using
the comma separator. Either type of quote delimiting is available. The preceding
example would be expressed as:
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD “1e6,,,,,,,,,,This is my comment”or
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD '1e6,,,,,,,,,,This is my comment’
202
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt Subsection
If a mark were desired in the above example, the command would be:
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD “1e6,,,,,,1,,,,This is my comment”
The Mark and detector fields allow human readable input forms:
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD “1e6,,,,,,On,,,,This is my comment”
NOTE
If an amplitude value is provided in the format string, the associated
detector flag is automatically turned on unless explicitly turned off in
the same data format string.
For example:
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD “1e6,-10000,,,,,On”
This provides a peak detector amplitude and turns the mark flag on. The peak
detector flag is turned on implicitly which allows the amplitude value to be
displayed in the signal list.
The FETCH process allows the selection of the current signal or the signal at an
explicit index. If the index is out of range, an empty string is returned.
The FETCH process also returns the current state of the signal. Continuing the
example above, if a signal were added, the list cursor were set to the last signal and
a fetch immediately performed, the command sequence would be:
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:ADD “1e6,3012,,,,,On,,,,This is my
comment”
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:SEL LAST
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:FETCH? CURRent
The returned value would appear in this form:
1000000,3012,0,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,’This is my comment’
Additional detail is provided when the signal has been measured.
A measurement provides new detector values, amplitudes from the detectors used,
a valid uncertainty and a potential correction factor.
Detailed Field Descriptions
Frequency
ADD - Frequency is the only required field for the ADD
command. The frequency may be expressed in Hz or
engineering notation. Examples: 1000000, 1e6, 1.545e6.
FETCH - The frequency is returned in Hz using engineering
notation.
Peak, Quasi-Peak, and Average Amplitudes
ADD - The amplitudes may be entered in integer or engineering
notation. The units are mdBm
FETCH - The amplitudes are returned in mdBm.
Chapter 5
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt Subsection
Uncertainty
ADD – The uncertainty for a signal may be entered for a signal.
If not provided the default value for the instrument is applied to
the signal. The uncertainty may be entered in Hz or engineering
notation.
FETCH – The uncertainly is returned in Hz.
Total Correction ADD – The total correction factor may be entered in integer or
engineering format. The units are mdB.
FETCH – The total correction factor is returned in mdB.
Mark
ADD – The signal may be marked during the ADD process by
setting this flag to 1 or On. It may also be explicitly turned Off
or 0.
FETCH – The signal mark is returned as a 1 (On) or 0 (Off).
Peak, Quasi-Peak, and Average Detector Amplitude Flags
ADD – The presence of an amplitude number in the add string
automatically turns on the amplitude flag for that detector. That
value may be overridden by explicitly setting the detector to 0 or
Off.
FETCH – The detector flag is returned as a 1 (On) or 0 (Off).
Comment
ADD – The comment is a single line of text with a maximum
length of 31 characters. Characters in excess of 31 are truncated.
FETCH – The comment is returned in the 11th position and
delimited by commas.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Clear Marks
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:CLEar ALL|CURRent|<integer>
Clears marks on all, current, or specific signals
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
This command takes an <integer> value which corresponds to
the position of a signal in the signal list. Valid range is 1 to 2000.
Front Panel
Access:
MEASURE, More, Signal Marking, Clear
204
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt Subsection
Set Comment for Signals
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:COMMent:ALL <string>
Set comment for all signals.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
The comment is a string consisting of a single line of text with a
maximum length of text characters of 31. Characters in excess
of 31 are truncated.
Set Comment for Current Signal
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:COMMent:CURRent <string>
Set comment for current signal.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
The comment is a string consisting of a single line of text with a
maximum length of text characters of 31. Characters in excess
of 31 are truncated.
Set Comment for Marked Signals
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:COMMent:MARKed <string>
Set comment for all marked signals.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
The comment is a string consisting of a single line of text with a
maximum length of text characters of 31. Characters in excess
of 31 are truncated.
Delete Signal
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:DELete ALL|CURRent|MARKed| <integer>
Deletes all, current, marked, or specific signals from signal list.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
This command takes an <integer> value which
corresponds to the position of a signal in the signal list. Valid
range is 1 to 2000.
Front Panel
Access:
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Delete Signal
Chapter 5
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt Subsection
Turn Signal List On or Off
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:DISPlay[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:DISPlay:STATe?
Sets the state of the signal list, On or Off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
Once the state function is selected, the selected state is
persistent. Persistent means that it retains the setting previously
selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
MEASURE, More, Signal List
MEASURE, More, Signal List, List Edit
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Delete Signals
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Remeasure
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Signal Marking
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Sort Signals
Retrieve Signal as a String
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:FETCh? CURRent|<integer>
Retrieve the current or specific signal as a string (comma separated fields).
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
This command takes an <integer> value which corresponds to
the position of a signal in the signal list. Valid range is 1 to 2000.
Retrieve Signals in List
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:LENGth?
Retrieve the number of signals in the signal list.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Mark Selected Signals
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:MARK
ALL|CURRent|TOEnd|DUPLicate|LOWer|COMPlement <integer>
Marks signals based on the current parameter. Default is current.
ALL - all signals
206
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt Subsection
CURRent - current signal.
TOEnd - from the current signal to the end of the list.
DUPLicates - all duplicate signals.
LOWer- all lower amplitude duplicates.
COMPlement - complement signals.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Front Panel
Access:
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Signal Marking, Mark Signal
Position Cursor to Signal List
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:SELect FIRSt|LAST|NEXT|PREVious|
<integer>
Position cursor to signal in list.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
Once this function is defined (Signal List On), the cursor is
positioned and the selected state is persistent. Persistent means
that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a
power cycle.
This command takes a signal-index value which corresponds to
the position of a signal in the signal list. Valid range is 1 to 2000.
Front Panel
Access:
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Signal List
Specify Sort Key
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:SORT
FREQuency|PEAK|QPEak|AVERage|LLINE1|LLINE2
ASCending|DESending
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:SORT FREQ, ASC?
Specifies the sort key and order for signal list sorting. Both the sort and order are
required. The format is comma separated.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Front Panel
Access:
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Sort Signals, By Freq
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Sort Signals, By Pk Ampl
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Sort Signals, By QP Ampl
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Sort Signals, By ∆ LL1
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Sort Signals, By ∆ LL2
Chapter 5
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:EMI:SLISt Subsection
Specify Signal List Display Parameters
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:View
COMMent|PEAK|QPEak|AVERage
:CALCulate:EMI:SLISt:View?
Specifies the signal display parameters given by the following:
COMM - Displays the comment for each of the signals in the list.
PEAK - Displays the difference values, in dB, from the measured peak value
and the limit lines.
QPEak - Displays the difference values, in dB, from the measured quasi-peak
value and the limit lines.
AVERage - Displays the difference values, in dB, from the measured average
value and the limit lines.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Front Panel
Access:
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Edit List, Comment
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Edit List, Pk Ampl
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Edit List, QP Ampl
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Edit List, AV Ampl
208
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Limit lines can be defined for your measurement. You can then have the instrument
compare the data to your defined limits and indicate a pass/fail condition.
NOTE
Refer also to :MMEMoryand :TRACe subsystems for more trace and limit line
commands.
Delete All Correction Sets in Memory
:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete
Deletes all correction sets in volatile memory.
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Delete All Limits
Control Limit Line Amplitude Interpolation
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE
LOGarithmic|LINear
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE?
Selects the type of interpolation done for the amplitude values of the designated
limit line when comparing to measured data.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
Once this function is defined, the selected type is persistent.
Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected,
even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Amptd Interp Log Lin
Set Fixed or Relative Limit Lines
:CALCulate:LLINe:CMODe FIXed|RELative
:CALCulate:LLINe:CMODe?
Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative.
NOTE
If you need to change the domain with
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain, do it before this command.
Changing the domain deletes all the existing limit line values.
Chapter 5
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by preset
Remarks:
For Amplitude Parameters:
Regardless of whether the limit line is based on frequency or
sweep time, amplitude parameters in a limit line table represent
absolute values or relative values. In fixed, the limit line
amplitude values are specified in absolute amplitude and do not
depend on the reference level. In relative, the limit line
amplitude values are relative to the current reference level.
For Fixed Frequency Parameters:
The frequency values in a limit line table are fixed values, and
the limit line is positioned accordingly. Fixed limit lines are
specified in absolute frequency and do not depend upon the
center frequency values.
For Relative Frequency Parameters:
The frequency values in a limit line table are relative values and
positions the limit line relative to the center frequency settings.
Relative limit lines are specified in relative frequency and are
positioned with respect to the current center frequency. When
the current center frequency value is changed, the segment
frequencies are converted according to the current center
frequency value.
For Time Parameters:
Limit lines that are based on sweep time are always relative to
the start time. The horizontal position of the limit line is not
affected by this command.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limits Fixed Rel
Set Limit Line X-axis Units
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency|TIME
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain?
Selects how the limit line segments are defined: according to frequency, or
according to the sweep time setting of the spectrum analyzer.
NOTE
Changing this setting deletes all existing limit data from the analyzer. In other
words, if a limit line has already been defined, changing the type clears the existing
limit line.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by Preset
210
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Remarks:
For TIME, the limit line segments are placed on the spectrum
analyzer display with respect to the sweep time setting of the
analyzer, with 0 at the left edge of the display.
For FREQuency, segments are placed according to the
frequency that is specified for each segment.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, X Axis Units Freq Time
Control Limit Line Frequency Interpolation
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE
LOGarithmic|LINear
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE?
Selects the type of interpolation done for the frequency values of the designated
limit line when comparing to measured data. This only applies in the frequency
domain. This function does not work in zero span (when the analyzer is in the time
domain).
Remarks:
Once this function is defined, the selected type is persistent.
Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected,
even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Freq Interp Log Lin
Define Limit Line Values
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA
<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>{,<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>}
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA?
Defines limit line values, and destroys all existing data. Up to 200 points may be
defined for each limit. No units are allowed.
•
•
•
<x-axis> – can be frequency or time values as specified by
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain. Frequencies are always in Hz.
Time is always in seconds. No unit is allowed in this parameter.
<ampl> – amplitude values are in the current Y-axis units. Up to two amplitude
values can be provided for each x-axis value, by repeating <x-axis> in the data
list. No unit is allowed in this parameter.
<connected> – connected values are either 0 or 1. A 1 means this point should
be connected to the previously defined point to define the limit line. A 0 means
that it is a point of discontinuity and is not connected to the preceding point.
The “connected” value is ignored for the first point.
Example:
CALC:LLIN1:DATA
1000000000,–20,0,200000000,–30,1
Range:
<x-axis>–30 Gs to +30 Gs for time limits
Chapter 5
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
<x-axis>–30 GHz to +350 GHz for frequency limits
<ampl>–120 dBm to +100 dBm
<connected>0 or 1
Remarks:
If two amplitude values are entered for the same frequency, a
single vertical line is the result. In this case, if an upper line is
chosen, the amplitude of lesser frequency (amplitude 1) is
tested. If a lower line is chosen, the amplitude of greater
frequency (amplitude 2) is tested.
For linear amplitude interpolation and linear frequency
interpolation, the interpolation is computed as:
yi + 1 – yi
---------------------
y =
(f – fi) + yi
fi + 1 – fi
For linear amplitude interpolation and log frequency
interpolation, the interpolation is computed as:
yi + 1 – yi
--------------------------------------
y =
(log f – log fi) + yi
log fi + 1 – log fi
For log amplitude interpolation and linear frequency
interpolation, the interpolation is computed as:
log yi + 1 – log yi
----------------------------------------
log y =
(f – fi) + log yi
f
i + 1 – fi
For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation,
the interpolation is computed as:
log yi + 1 – log yi
----------------------------------------
log y =
(log f – log fi) + logyi
log fi + 1 – log fi
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, X Axis Units Freq Time
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Point
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Frequency
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Amplitude
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Connected
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Delete Point
212
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Merge Additional Values into the Existing Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA:MERGe
<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>{,<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>}
Adds the points with the specified values to the current limit line, allowing you to
merge limit line data. Up to two amplitude values are allowed for each x value. If
too much data is merged, as many points as possible are merged into the existing
limit and then an error is reported. Up to 200 points total may be defined for each
limit.
•
<x-axis> can be frequency or time values as specified by
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain. Frequencies are always in Hz.
Time is always in seconds. No unit is allowed in this parameter.
<ampl> – amplitude values are in the current Y-axis units. No unit is allowed in
this parameter.
<connected> connected values are either 0 or 1. A 1 means this point should be
connected to the previously defined point to define the limit line. A 0 means
that it is a point of discontinuity and is not connected to the preceding point.
The “connected” value is ignored for the first point.
•
•
Range:
<x-axis> –30 Gs to +30 Gs for time limits
<x-axis> –30 GHz to +350 GHz for frequency limits
<ampl> –120 dBm to +100 dBm
<connected> 0 or 1
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, X Axis Units Freq Time
Delete Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DELete
Deletes the selected limit line.
Display the Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DISPlay OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DISPlay?
Controls the display of the current limit line.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Limit On Off
Chapter 5
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Test the Data Against the Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:FAIL?
Queries the status of the limit line testing. Returns a 0 if the data passes, and
returns a 1 if there is a failure. This query value is valid only if margin or limit test
is On. Use the command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe OFF|ON|0|1to
activate limit line testing.
Set the Margin Size
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin?
Allows you to define the amount of measurement margin that is added to the
designated limit line.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Default Units:
Remarks:
not affected
dB
The margin must be negative for upper limit lines, and positive
for lower limits.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Margin On Off
Display the Limit Margin
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin:STATe?
Allows you to display a measurement margin that is added to the designated limit
line to do secondary testing of the data.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Margin On Off
214
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Control Limit Line Testing
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe?
Turns limit line testing on/off. The limit and margin will only be tested if they are
displayed. Use :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DISPlayto turn on the display
of limit lines, and :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin:STATeto turn on
the display of margins. If margin and limit display are both turned off, limit test is
automatically turned off. Use :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:FAIL?to return the
state of pass or fail after limit line state has been turned on.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Limit On Off
Select the Type of Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:TYPE UPPer|LOWer
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:TYPE?
Sets a limit line to be either an upper or lower type limit line. An upper line will be
used as the maximum allowable value when comparing with the data. A lower
limit line defines the minimum value.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Upper; not affected by preset
Remarks:
If a margin has already been set for this limit line, and this
command is used to change the limit type, then the margin value
is reset to 0 dB.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Type Upper Lower
Chapter 5
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Markers All Off on All Traces
:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
Turns off all markers on all the traces.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Marker All Off
Continuous Peaking Marker Function
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:CPEak[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:CPEak[:STATe]?
Turns on or off continuous peaking. It continuously puts the selected marker on the
highest displayed signal peak.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
This command may not be used to activate a given marker.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Continuous Pk On Off
Frequency Counter Marker Resolution
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution <real>
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution?
Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter. Setting the resolution to
AUTO will couple the marker counter resolution to the frequency span.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
1 kHz
Range:
1 Hz to 100 kHz
Hz
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
Freq Count, Resolution Auto Man
216
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Frequency Counter Marker Automatic Resolution
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO?
Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter so it is automatically coupled
to the frequency span, generating the fastest accurate count.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Front Panel
Access:
Freq Count, Resolution Auto Man
Frequency Counter Marker
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt[:STATe]?
Turns on or off the marker frequency counter. To query the frequency counter, use
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]:FCOunt:X?If the specified marker number is not
the active marker, it becomes the active marker. If the specified marker number is
not on, it is turned on and becomes the active marker. Once the marker count is on,
it is on for any active marker, not just for the one used in the command. A 1 is
returned only if marker count is on and the selected number is the active marker.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
If a frequency count x value is generated when the frequency
count state is off, then 9e15 is returned.
Front Panel
Access:
Freq Count, Marker Count On Off
Frequency Counter Marker Query
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:X?
Queries the marker frequency counter.
Remarks:
If a frequency count x value is generated when the frequency
count state is off, then 9e15 is returned.
Marker Function
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion BPOWer|NOISe|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion?
Selects the marker function for the specified marker. To query the value returned
by the function, use :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?
Chapter 5
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
BPOWer is the power integrated within the bandwidth
NOISe is a noise measurement
OFF turns off all functions
Remarks:
When a measurement under the front panel MEASUREkey is
started, this command is turned off. If this command is turned
on when any of the MEASUREkey measurements are in
progress, that measurement will be stopped.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Function
Marker Peak (Maximum) Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum
Performs a peak search based on the search mode settings of
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE.
NOTE
See command :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Meas Tools, Peak Search
Marker Peak (Maximum) Left Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum:LEFT
Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak to the left of the current
marked peak.
Remarks:
The marker will be placed at the next highest peak that rises and
falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold. If
no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria, a No Peak
Found error (202) is given.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Next Pk Left
Marker Next Peak (Maximum) Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum:NEXT
Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak from the current marked
peak.
Remarks:
The marker will be placed at the highest peak that rises and falls
by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold. If no
peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria, a No Peak
Found error (202) is given.
218
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Next Peak
Marker Peak (Maximum) Right Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum:RIGHt
Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak to the right of the
current marked peak.
Remarks:
The marker will be placed at the highest peak that rises and falls
by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold. If no
peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria, a No Peak
Found error (202) is given.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Next Pk Right
Marker Peak (Minimum) Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MINimum
Places the selected marker on the lowest point on the trace that is assigned to that
particular marker number.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Min Search
Marker Mode
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE POSition|DELTa|BAND|SPAN
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE?
Selects the type of markers that you want to activate. Refer to the “Agilent EMC
Analyzers User’s Guide” for a more complete explanation of this function.
Position selects a normal marker that can be positioned on a trace and from
which trace information will be generated.
Delta activates a pair of markers, one of which is fixed at the current marker
location. The other marker can then be moved around on the trace. The marker
readout shows the difference between the two markers.
Band activates a pair of band markers, where each marker can be independently
positioned on the trace. The marker readout shows the difference between the
two markers.
Span activates a pair of span markers, where the marker positioning is
controlled by changing the span and/or center frequency between the two
markers. The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers.
Remarks:
If a marker is not active when the mode is queried, “Off” will be
returned.
Chapter 5
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Normal
Marker, Delta
Marker, Delta Pair Ref Delta
Marker, Span Pair Span Center
Define Peak Excursion
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion?
Specifies the minimum signal excursion above the threshold for the internal peak
identification routine to recognize a signal as a peak. This applies to all traces and
all windows. (The excursion is the delta power from the noise level to the signal
peak.)
NOTE
See command :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE
Factory Preset
and *RST:
6 dB
Range:
0 to 100 dB
dB
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Search Criteria, Peak Excursion
Define Peak Search
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE PARameter|MAXimum
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE?
Sets the peak search mode.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
MAXimum
Remarks:
If mode is set to MAXimum, peak search will place the marker
at the maximum amplitude in the trace. If mode is set to
PARameter, peak search will place the marker at the highest
peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the
peak threshold. If no peak meets the excursion and threshold
criteria, a No Peak Found error (error 202) is issued.
Next peak, next peak right, next peak left, and peak table are not
affected by this command. They will always use peak excursion
and peak threshold for search criteria.
Front Panel
220
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Search Criteria, Peak Search
Type, Max Value|Excursion & Threshold
Define Peak Threshold
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl>
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold?
Specifies the minimum signal level for the analyzers internal peak identification
routine to recognize a signal as a peak. This applies to all traces and all windows.
NOTE
See command :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE
Range:
Reference level to the bottom of the display
Amplitude units
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Search Criteria, Peak Threshold
Peak to Peak Delta Markers
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:PTPeak
Positions delta markers on the highest and lowest points on the trace.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Pk-Pk Search
Set Center Frequency to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:CENTer
Sets the center frequency equal to the specified marker frequency, which moves the
marker to the center of the screen. In delta marker mode, the center frequency is set
to the marker delta value. This command is not available in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker –>, Mkr –> CF
Set Reference Level to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:RLEVel
Sets the reference level to the specified marker amplitude. In delta marker mode,
the reference level is set to the amplitude difference between the markers.
Front Panel
Access:.
Marker –>, Mkr –> Ref Lvl
.
Peak Search (or Search), Meas Tools, Mkr –> Ref Lvl
Chapter 5
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Set Span to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:SPAN
Sets the span to the value of the specified marker frequency. The specified marker
must be in delta mode. Select the delta marker mode with
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE DELTa. This command is not available
in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Delta, Marker –>, Mkr ∆ –> Span
Set Start Frequency to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:STARt
Sets the start frequency to the value of the specified marker frequency. In delta
marker mode, the start frequency is set to the marker delta value. This command is
not available in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker –>, Mkr –> Start
Set Center Frequency Step Size to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:STEP
Sets the center frequency step size to match the marker frequency. In delta marker
mode, the center frequency step size will be set to the frequency difference
between the markers. Select the delta marker mode with
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE DELTa. This command is not
available if the delta marker is off, or in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker –>, Mkr –> CF Step
Peak Search (or Search), Meas Tools, Mkr –> CF
Set Stop Frequency to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:STOP
Sets the stop frequency to the value of the active marker frequency. In delta marker
mode, the stop frequency is set to the marker delta value. This command is not
available in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker –>, Mkr –> Stop
Marker On/Off
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:STATe?
222
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Turns the selected marker on or off.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Off
Marker Table On/Off
:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe:STATe?
Turns the marker table on or off
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Marker Table On Off
Marker to Trace
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRACe <integer>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRACe?
Assigns the specified marker to the designated trace 1, 2, or 3.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
1
Range:
1 to 3
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3
Marker to Trace Auto
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRACe:AUTO?
Turns on or off the automatic marker to trace function.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
AUTO ON
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3
Continuous Signal Tracking Function
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRCKing[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRCKing[:STATe]?
Turns on or off marker signal tracking. It continuously puts the selected marker on
the highest displayed signal peak and moves it to the center frequency. This allows
you to keep a signal that is drifting in frequency, on the display.
Chapter 5
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
When a measurement under the front panel MEASUREkey is
started, this command is turned off. If this command is turned
on when any of the MEASUREkey measurements are in
progress, that measurement will be stopped.
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, Signal Track On Off
Marker X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X?
Position the designated marker on its assigned trace at the specified trace X value.
The value is in the X-axis units (which is often frequency or time).
The query returns the current X value of the designated marker.
Default Unit:
Matches the units of the trace on which the marker is positioned
Front Panel
Access:
Marker
Span Markers Center Frequency X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer?
Position the center frequency, of the designated span-type marker pair, at the
specified trace X value. The value is in the X-axis units (which is often frequency
or time) Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE SPANto select span markers.
The query returns the current X value center frequency of the designated markers.
Range:
Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are
positioned
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Span Pair
Marker X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition <integer>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition?
Position the designated marker on its assigned trace at the specified X position.
The query returns the current X position for the designated marker.
Range:
Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
224
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Front Panel
Access:
Marker
Span Markers Center Frequency X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer?
Position the center frequency, of the designated span-type marker pair, at the
specified trace X position. Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE SPANto select
span markers.
The query returns the current X position center frequency of the designated
markers.
Range:
Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Span Pair
Span Markers Span X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN?
Change the frequency span, of the designated span-type marker pair, to position
the markers at the desired trace X positions. Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE
SPANto select span markers.
The query returns the current X position frequency span of the designated markers.
Range:
Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Span Pair
Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt?
Position the left-most marker, the start (reference) frequency of the designated
band-type marker pair, at the specified trace X position. Use
:CALCulate:MARKer:MODE BANDto select band markers.
The query returns the current X position start/reference frequency of the
designated marker.
Range:
Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Delta Pair
Chapter 5
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP?
Position the right-most marker, the stop frequency of the designated band-type
marker pair, at the specified trace X position. Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE
BANDto select band markers.
The query returns the current X position stop frequency of the designated marker.
Range:
Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Delta
Marker X-Axis Readout
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:READout
FREQuency|TIME|ITIMe|PERiod
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:READout?
Selects the units for the x-axis readout of the marker. Available units are:
Frequency
Time
Inverse of time
Period
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Frequency
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Readout, Frequency
Marker, Readout, Time
Marker, Readout, Inverse Time
Marker, Readout, Period
Span Markers Span X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN?
Change the frequency span of the designated span-type marker pair to position the
markers at the desired trace X values. The value is in the X-axis units (which is
usually frequency or time). Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE SPANto select
span markers.
The query returns the current X value frequency span of the designated markers. If
span markers are not selected, the query returns the latest marker reading as a span
(always positive).
226
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Default Unit:
Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are
positioned.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Span Pair
Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt?
Position the start (reference) frequency of the designated band-type marker pair, at
the specified trace X value. The value is in the X-axis units (which is often
frequency or time). Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE BANDto select band
markers.
The query returns the current X value start/reference frequency of the designated
marker.
Default Unit:
Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are
positioned
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Delta Pair
Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP?
Position the stop frequency of the designated band-type marker pair, at the
specified trace X value. The value is in the X-axis units (which is often frequency
or time). Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE BANDto select band markers.
The query returns the current X value stop frequency of the designated marker.
Default Unit:
Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are
positioned
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Delta Pair
Marker Read Y Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?
Read the current Y value for the designated marker or delta on its assigned trace.
The value is in the Y-axis units for the current trace (which is often dBm).
Default Unit:
Remarks:
Matches the units of the trace on which the marker is positioned
This command can be used to read the results of marker
functions such as band power and noise that are displayed in the
marker value field on the analyzer.
Chapter 5
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALCulate:NTData Subsection
CALCulate:NTData Subsection
Normalize the Trace Data
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]?
One sweep of trace data is copied to trace 3 (firmware version greater then
A.03.03, NRMLin firmware version less than or equal to A.03.03), which is used as
the reference trace. Then for all subsequent trace sweeps, display trace 1 = data
collected into trace 1 – data in trace 3 (firmware version greater than A.03.03,
NRML in firmware version less than or equal to A.03.03).
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Normalize, Normalize On Off
228
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALibration Subsystem
CALibration Subsystem
These commands control the self-alignment and self-diagnostic processes.
Align All Instrument Assemblies
:CALibration[:ALL]
:CALibration[:ALL]?
Performs an alignment of all the assemblies within the instrument, except for the
tracking generator (Option 1DN), if installed (except Agilent model E7401A).
Before executing this command, connect a cable between front panel connector
AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent EMC analyzers except
Agilent model E7401A.
If the cable is not connected, CAL:ALLwill perform a subset of the RF alignment
and a subsequent CAL:RFwill be required for the analyzer to meet its specified
performance.
The query performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of
the alignment. A zero is returned if the alignment is successful, even if only a
subset of the RF alignment is performed.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align Now, All
Set Auto Align Mode All or Not RF
:CALibration:AUTO:MODE ALL|NRF
:CALibration:AUTO:MODE?
This command determines whether or not to include RF alignment as part of the
automatic alignment routines. Eliminating automatic alignment of the RF prevents
changes in the input impedance between sweeps, which could cause input device
instability.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
All at power-up
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Auto Align, All
System, Alignments, Auto Align, All but RF
Chapter 5
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALibration Subsystem
Automatic Alignment
:CALibration:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALibration:AUTO?
Turns the automatic alignment on and off. This is run continuously, at the
completion of each sweep.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On at power-up
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Auto Align, All
System, Alignments, Auto Align, All but RF
System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off
Return to the Default Alignment Data
:CALibration:DATA:DEFault
Initializes the alignment data to the factory defaults.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Load Defaults
Align FM Demodulation
:CALibration:FMDemod
:CALibration:FMDemod?
Performs an alignment of the FM Demodulation board. The query form of this
command performs the alignment and returns zero if the alignment is successful.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align Now, FM Demod
Query the Internal or External Frequency Reference
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence?
This is a query only. It reports the location of where the instrument frequency
reference is generated.
Range:
INT or EXT
230
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALibration Subsystem
Coarse Adjust the Frequency Reference
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse <setting>
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse?
Allows coarse adjustment of the internal 10 MHz reference oscillator timebase of
the analyzer.
NOTE
:CALibration:ALLis required after COARseis set.
Range:
Integer, 0 to 255
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Time Base, Coarse
Fine Adjust the Frequency Reference
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:FINE <setting>
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:FINE?
Allows fine adjustment of the analyzer internal 10 MHz reference oscillator
timebase.
NOTE
:CALibration:ALLis required after FINEis set.
Range:
Integer, 0 to 255
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Time Base, Fine
Select the Frequency Corrections
:CALibration:FREQuency[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALibration:FREQuency[:STATe]?
Turns on or off the frequency corrections.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Freq Correct On Off
Align the RF Circuitry
:CALibration:RF
:CALibration:RF?
Performs an alignment of the RF assembly.
The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful.
Chapter 5
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
CALibration Subsystem
Before executing this command, connect a cable between front panel connector
AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent EMC analyzers except
Agilent model E7401A. If the cable is not connected, the alignment will fail.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align Now, RF
Select the Source State for Calibration
:CALibration:SOURce:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALibration:SOURce:STATe?
Controls the state of the 50 MHz alignment signal.
NOTE
The alignment signal is internally switched to the INPUT for Agilent model
E7401A. For all other models, connect a cable between front panel connector
AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector before performing a calibration.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
For Agilent EMC model E7401A:
Input/Output (or Input), Amptd Ref (f=50 MHz) On Off
For all other Agilent EMC models:
Input/Output (or Input), Amptd Ref Out (f=50 MHz) On Off
Calibrate the Tracking Generator
:CALibration:TG
:CALibration:TG?
Performs an alignment of the tracking generator assembly.
The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful.
NOTE
This command is applicable on all Agilent EMC models except E7401A with
Option 1DN installed. Before executing this command, connect a cable between
front panel connector RF OUT and the INPUT connector. The alignment will fail
using command CAL:TGif the cable is not connected.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align Now, TG
232
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
COUPle Subsystem
COUPle Subsystem
Some measurement settings are automatically coupled together to optimize speed
and accuracy. These commands control that coupling.
COUPle the Function to Other Settings
:COUPle ALL|NONE
:COUPle?
The instrument can automatically couple instrument settings together for accurate
measurements and optimum dynamic range. This command is used to override the
coupling for special measurement needs.
COUPle NONEputs these functions into the manually set (not coupled) mode.
COUPle ALLputs the functions into the auto coupled mode, and also puts the
sweep coupling mode into SA (couple all).
The following list of analyzer functions can be automatically coupled:
Resolution bandwidth
Center Frequency
Average type (Firmware revision A.08.00 or greater)
Marker functions
Detector (Firmware revision A.08.00 or greater)
Marker functions
Average On Off
Average type
Attenuation
Reference level
External amplifier gain
Preamp
Center frequency step
Span (in swept spans)
Resolution bandwidth (in zero spans)
Video bandwidth
Resolution bandwidth
Tracking Generator
Sweep coupling mode (SR/SA)
VBW/RBW ratio (Firmware revision A.08.00 or greater)
Sweep time
Span
Video bandwidth
Resolution bandwidth
Chapter 5
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
COUPle Subsystem
Sweep points
Phase noise optimization
Phase Noise Optimization (Firmware revision A.08.00 or greater)
Span
NOTE
Although marker count, gate time, and marker trace have auto settings, they are not
affected by Couple.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
All
Front Panel
Access:
Auto Couple, Auto All
234
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPlay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual,
graphical, and trace information. Within a display, information may be separated
into individual windows.
Display Viewing Angle
:DISPlay:ANGLe <integer>
:DISPlay:ANGLe?
Changes the viewing angle for better viewing in different environments.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is 4. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Range:
Integer, 1 to 7
Front Panel
Access:
Viewing angle keys
Date and Time Display Format
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk:DATE:FORMat MDY|DMY
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk:DATE:FORMat?
Allows you to set the format for displaying the real-time clock. To set the date time
use: SYSTem:DATE <year>, <month>, <day>.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is MDY. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Time/Date, Date Format MDY DMY
Date and Time Display
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk[:STATe]?
Turns on and off the display of the date and time on the spectrum analyzer screen.
Chapter 5
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is On. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Time/Date, Time/Date On Off
Display Annotation Title Data
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA <string>
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA?
Enters the text that will be displayed in the user title area of the display.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Title
Display, Title, Change Title
Display, Title, Clear Title
Turn the Entire Display On/Off
:DISPlay:ENABle OFF|ON|0|1
Turns the display on or off. Having the display turned off may increase repetitive
measurement rate.
The following key presses will turn display enable back on:
1. If in local, press any key
2. If in remote, press the local (system) key
3. If in local lockout, no key (the computer must either cancel local lockout, or
re-enable the display)
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Turn the Full Screen Display On/Off
:DISPlay:MENU:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:MENU:STATe?
Turns the full screen display mode on or off. Press System, System to turn off full
screen mode.
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
236
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Window Annotation
:DISPlay:WINDow:ANNotation[:ALL] OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:WINDow:ANNotation[:ALL]?
Turns the screen annotation on or off for all windows.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Preferences, Annotation On Off
Trace Graticule Display
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]?
Turns the graticule on or off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Preferences, Graticule On Off
Trace X-Axis Scale Offset
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:OFFSet <freq>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:OFFSet?
Specifies the frequency offset for all frequency readouts such as center frequency,
except that it does not affect marker count.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0 Hz
Range:
–500 THz to 500 THz
Default Unit:
History:
Hz
Prior to firmware revision A.06.00, the lower range is –3 GHz.
Remarks:
Frequency offset is not available when frequency scale type is
Log ([:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic).
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, Freq Offset
Chapter 5
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Display Line Amplitude
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe <ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe?
Defines the level of the display line, in the active amplitude units if no units are
specified.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
2.5 divisions below the reference level
Range:
10 display divisions below the reference level to the reference
level
Default Unit:
Current active units
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Display Line On Off
Display Line On/Off
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe?
Turns the display line on or off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Display Line On Off
IF Gain Auto/Reference Level Auto Ranging
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LOG:RANGe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LOG:RANGe:AUTO?
This command enables and disables auto ranging. The speed benefits gained with
this command are realized only when in narrow resolution (digital) bandwidths.
The setting of auto range has no effect when in analog resolution bandwidths.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
History:
This command is available with firmware revision A.04.00 and
later.
Remarks:
When using digital resolution bandwidths (RBW < 1 kHz) the
analyzer uses IF Gain auto ranging to set the optimum signal
gain for digital processing. This technique produces the greatest
measurement range without overloading the digital system. To
increase the measurement speed this IF Gain auto ranging may
be set to fixed mode. When in fixed mode, make sure the signal
238
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
is not set above the reference level and the reference is set so
that the signal is within the display range. When in fixed mode
the measurement has approximately 70 dB of display range.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, IF Gain Auto Fixed (front panel access
is available with firmware revision A.06.00 and later).
Normalized Reference Level
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel?
Sets the normalized reference level.
NOTE
See command :CALCulate:NTData[STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0 dB
Range:
–327.6 to 327.6 dB
Current active units
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Normalize, Norm Ref Lvl
Normalized Reference Level Position
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition <integer>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition?
Selects the position of the normalized reference level. The top and bottom graticule
lines correspond to 10 and 0, respectively.
NOTE
See command :CALCulate:NTData[STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
Factory Preset
and *RST:
10
Range:
integer
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Normalize, Norm Ref Posn
Chapter 5
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Trace Y-Axis Amplitude Scaling
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?
Sets the per-division display scaling for the y-axis when y-axis units are set to
amplitude units.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
10 dB
Range:
0.1 to 20.0 dB
dB
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Scale/Div
Trace Y-Axis Frequency Scaling
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:FREQuency<freq>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:FREQuency?
This command sets the per-division display scaling for the y-axis, when the y-axis
units are set to frequency units, such as when looking at FM deviation with the
command [:SENSe]:DEMod:VIEW[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
20 kHz
Range:
1 kHz to 240 kHz
Default Unit:
Hz
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Scale/Div
Trace Y-Axis Reference Level
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?
Sets the amplitude value of the reference level for the y-axis.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
107 dBµV
Range:
EMC E7401A: –149.9 to 50 dBm
EMC E7402A, E7403A, E7404A, E7405A:
–149.9 to 55 dBm
240
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
–42.9 to 162 dBµV with zero reference level offset and max
mixer level = 97 dBµV.
Default Unit:
Remarks:
Current active units
The input attenuator setting may be affected. The minimum
displayed value of reference level is –327.6 dBm, and the
maximum displayed value is 327.6 dBm. See the remarks given
for the command
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
<rel_ampl>
Front Panel
Access:
Amplitude Y Scale, Ref Level
Trace Y-Axis Reference Level Offset
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet?
Sets the amplitude level offset for the y-axis.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0 dB
Range:
–327.6 to 327.6 dB
Default Unit:
Remarks:
dB
The sum of (reference level offset + reference level) is clipped to
the range –327.6 to 327.6 dB. The maximum limits are
determined by the setting of the first of these two parameters,
within the boundaries of their individual limits when initially
set.
For example, if the reference level is (first) set to –20 dBm, then
the reference level offset can be set to values of –307.6 dB to
327.6 dB. In the case of a 327.6 dB reference level offset, the
resultant reference level value changes to 307.6 dBm. The
reference level value range can be initially set to values from
–149.9 to 55 dBm.
Setting the reference level offset value first yields the following:
If the reference level offset is (first) set to –30 dB, then the
reference level can be set to values of –327.6 to 25 dBm. The
reference level is “clamped” at 25 dBm because its positive
value of 55 dBm is reached at 25 dBm with an offset of –30 dB.
Its own positive amplitude limit applies.
If the reference level offset is (first) set to 30 dB, then the
reference level can be set to values of –327.6 to 85 dBm. Again,
the positive amplitude limit of reference level (alone) is factored
in to the resultant combined limit.
Chapter 5
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
Amplitude Y Scale, Ref Level Offst
Vertical Axis Scaling
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?
Specifies the vertical graticule divisions as log or linear units.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Logarithmic
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Scale Type Log Lin
242
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
FORMat Subsystem
FORMat Subsystem
The FORMat subsystem sets a data format for transferring numeric and array
information. TRACe[:DATA] and TRACe[:DATA]?are affected by FORMat
subsystem commands.
Byte Order
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
:FORMat:BORDer?
This command selects the binary data byte order for data transfer. It controls
whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode. This command
affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the
:TRACe[:DATA]and query :TRACe[:DATA]? commands.
NOTE
Normal mode is when the byte sequence begins with the most significant byte
(MSB) first, and ends with the least significant byte (LSB) last in the sequence:
1|2|3|4. Swapped mode is when the byte sequence begins with the LSB first, and
ends with the MSB last in the sequence: 4|3|2|1.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Normal
Numeric Data format
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]ASCii|INTeger,32|REAL,32|
REAL,64|UINTeger,16
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]?
This command changes the format of the trace data input and output. It affects only
the data format for setting and querying trace data for the :TRACe[:DATA]and
query :TRACe[:DATA]? commands.
NOTE
This command specifies the formats used for trace data during data transfer across
any remote port.
For corrected trace data (:TRACe[:DATA] with parameter <trace_name>),
REAL, and ASCiiformats will provide trace data in the current amplitude units.
INTegerformat will provide trace data in mdBm. The fastest mode is
INTeger,32.
For uncorrected trace data (:TRACe[:DATA] with parameter RAWTRACE),
UINTeger, and INTegerformats apply to RAWTRACEqueries, and return
uncorrected ADC values. The fastest mode is UINTeger,16.
For state data, the format cannot be changed. It is always in a machine readable
format only (machine units).
Chapter 5
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
FORMat Subsystem
Table 5-2
Corrected Trace Data Types
:TRACe:DATA? <trace_name>
Data Type
Result
ASCII
Amplitude Units
Internal Units
INT,32 (fastest)
REAL,32
REAL,64
Amplitude Units
Amplitude Units
Table 5-3
Uncorrected Trace Data Types
:TRACe:DATA? RAWTRACE
Data Type
Result
INT,32
Uncorrected ADC Values
Uncorrected ADC Values
UINT,16 (fastest)
ASCii- Amplitude values are in ASCII, in amplitude units, separated by
commas.
INTeger, 32- Binary 32-bit integer values in internal units (mdBm), in a
definite length block.
REAL, 32(or 64) - Binary 32-bit, or 64-bit, real values in amplitude units), in
a definite length block.
UINTeger, 16- Binary 16-bit unsigned integer uncorrected ADC values, in a
definite length block.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
ASCII
244
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
HCOPy Subsystem
HCOPy Subsystem
The HCOPy subsystem controls the setup of plotting and printing to an external
device.
Abort the Print
:HCOPy:ABORt
Aborts hard copy printout of results.
Front Panel
Access:
ESC (with print in progress)
Printer Type
:HCOPy:DEVice:TYPE AUTO|CUSTom|NONE
:HCOPy:DEVice:TYPE?
Sets up the printer by selecting printer type.
AUTO - the instrument queries the printer to determine the printer type and
automatically sets itself for that printer
CUSTom - allows you to select a custom printer if your printer cannot be
auto-configured
NONE - tells the instrument that the hard copy output device is not a printer
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is AUTO. This parameter is persistent,
which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, Printer Type
Select Report Content
:HCOPy:EMI:ITEM:REPort:SCReen|SLISt|ISETups[:State]
|ON|OFF|1|0
:HCOPy:EMI:ITEM:REPort:SCReem|SLISt|ISETups[:State]?
Selection of report content: screen dump, signal list, and instrument setups.
Print Report
:HCOPy:EMI:REPort:IMMediate
Prints a report.
Chapter 5
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
HCOPy Subsystem
Remarks:
This parameter retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Key Access:
Print
Select a Signal List to Include in a Report
:HCOPy:EMI:ITEM:SLISt:PPEak|QPEak|AVERage|LLINe1|LLINe2|
CORRection|UNCertainty|COMMent:STATe ON|OFF|1|0
:HCOPy:EMI:ITEM:SLISt:PPEak|QPEak|AVERage|LLINe1|LLINe2|
CORRection|UNCertainty|COMMent:STATe?
Selection of signal list columns to include in the report. (PK, QP, AVG, limit1,
limit2, correction, uncertainty, comment)
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Select a Signal List to Include in a Report (Delta)
:HCOPy:EMI:ITEM:SLISt:DELTa1|DELTa2:PPEak|QPEak|AVERage
:STATe ON|OFF|1|0
Selects delta from limit line values to include in report. For each combination of
limit lines (1 and 2) and detectors (PPEak. QPEak, and AVERage), this command
can be used to include or exclude the delta from the limit for that detector.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Color Hard Copy
:HCOPy:IMAGe:COLor[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:HCOPy:IMAGe:COLor[:STATe]?
Selects between color and monochrome mode for hard copy output.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is On. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
246
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
HCOPy Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, Color On Off
Print a Hard Copy
:HCOPy[:IMMediate]
The entire screen is output to the parallel port.
Front Panel
Access:
Print
Form Feed the Print Item
:HCOPy:ITEM:FFEed[:IMMediate]
Sends the printer a command to form feed.
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, Eject Page
Page Orientation
:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape|PORTrait
:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation?
Specifies the orientation of the print.
NOTE
Landscape mode is not presently supported for PCL-3 printers.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is Landscape. This parameter is persistent,
which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, Orientation, Landscape
Print Setup, Orientation, Portrait
Number of Items Printed on a Page
:HCOPy:PAGE:PRINts <integer>
:HCOPy:PAGE:PRINts?
Sets the number of display print outputs sent to print on one piece of paper, before
a form feed is sent.
Chapter 5
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
HCOPy Subsystem
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is 1. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Range:
Integer, 1 or 2
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, Prints/Page 1 2
Printed Page Size
:HCOPy:PAGE:SIZE A|B|A3|A4|LETTer|LEGal|EXECutive|LEDGer
:HCOPy:PAGE:SIZE?
Formats the print image for the selected page size. Page size “A” is letter, and page
size “B” is ledger. There is no size standardization for “legal” or “executive.”
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is letter. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, /Page Size
Select Report Type
:HCOPy:REPOrt:TYPE SCREen|REPort
Toggles between screen dump or report.
Remarks:
This parameter retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Key Access:
Print Setup, Print Screen Report
248
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
INITiate Subsystem
INITiate Subsystem
The INITiate subsystem is used to control the initiation of the trigger. Refer to the
TRIGger and ABORt subsystems for related commands.
Continuous or Single Measurements
:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1
:INITiate:CONTinuous?
Selects whether the trigger system is continuously initiated or not.
This command affects sweep if not in a measurement, and affects trigger when in a
measurement. A “measurement” refers to any of the functions under the
MEASURE key. This corresponds to continuous sweep or single sweep operation
when not in a measurement, and continuous measurement or single measurement
operation when in a measurement.
When not in a measurement, this command does the following:
•
When ON at the completion of each sweep cycle, the sweep system
immediately initiates another sweep cycle.
•
When OFF, the sweep system remains in an “idle” state until CONTinuous is
set to ON or an :INITiate[:IMMediate]command is received. On
receiving the :INITiate[:IMMediate]command, it will go through a
single sweep cycle, and then return to the “idle” state.
•
The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer. 1 is returned when there is
continuous sweeping. 0 is returned when there is only a single sweep.
When in a measurement, this command does the following:
•
When ON at the completion of each trigger cycle, the trigger system
immediately initiates another trigger cycle.
•
When OFF, the trigger system remains in an “idle” state until CONTinuous is
set to ON or an :INITiate[:IMMediate]command is received. On
receiving the :INITiate[:IMMediate]command, it will go through a
single trigger cycle, and then return to the “idle” state.
•
The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer. 1 is returned when in a
continuous measurement state. 0 is returned when there is only a single
measurement.
Factory Preset: Continuous
*RST:
Continuous, or On
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Sweep Cont Single
Single
Chapter 5
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
INITiate Subsystem
Meas Control, Measure Cont Single
Take New Data Acquisitions
:INITiate[:IMMediate]
This command initiates a sweep if not in a measurement. If in a measurement, it
triggers the measurement. A “measurement” refers to any function under the
MEASURE key.
Remarks:
See also the *TRGcommand
Use the :TRIGer[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal
command to select the external trigger.
The instrument must be in the single measurement mode. If
:INITiate:CONTinuous is ON then the command is ignored.
Use :FETCh?to transfer a measurement result from memory to
the output buffer. Refer to individual commands in the
MEASure subsystem for more information.
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Sweep Cont Single
Single
Meas Control, Measure Cont Single
Abort Measurement
:INITiate:ABort
This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu. Use this
command to abort the current measurement.
Remarks:
This command is equivalent of sending an :ABORt command
followed by an :INITiate[:IMMediate] command.
Front Panel
Access:
Meas Control, Abort
Pause the Measurement
:INITiate:PAUSe
This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu. Use this
command to pause the current measurement by changing the current measurement
state from the “wait for trigger” state to the “paused” state. If the measurement is
not in the “wait for trigger” state when the command is issued, the transition will
be made the next time that state is entered as part of the trigger cycle. When in the
pause state, the analyzer auto-align process stops. If the analyzer is paused for a
long period of time, measurement accuracy may degrade.
Remarks:
Only applies to auto measure.
250
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
INITiate Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
Meas Control, Pause
Restart the Measurement
:INITiate:RESTart
This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu. Use this
command to restart the present measurement from the “idle” state, regardless of its
operating state. It is equivalent to :INITiate[:IMMediate]for single
measurement mode, or :ABORt for continuous measurement mode.
Front Panel
Access:
Restart
Meas Control, Restart
Resume the Measurement
:INITiate:RESume
This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu. Use this
command to resume the current measurement by changing the current
measurement state from the “paused” state back to the “wait for trigger” state.
Front Panel
Access:
Meas Control, Resume
Chapter 5
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
INPut Subsystem
INPut Subsystem
The INPut subsystem controls the characteristics of analyzer input ports.
Input Port Coupling
:INPut:COUPling AC|DC
:INPut:COUPling?
Selects ac or dc coupling for the front panel INPUT port. A blocking capacitor is
switched in for the ac mode.
CAUTION
Instrument damage can occur if there is a dc voltage present at the INPUT and dc
coupling is selected.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
ac
Remarks:
This command is available only on Agilent EMC analyzer
models E7402A Option UKB, E7405A Option UKB, E7403A
or E7404A.
Table 5-4
Selecting Input Coupling
Model Number
AC
DC
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
E7402A with Option
100 kHz to 3 GHz
100 Hz to 3 GHz
UKB
E7403A
100 kHz to 6.7 GHz
100 kHz to 6.7 GHz
9 kHz to 6.7 GHz
100 Hz to 6.7 GHz
E7403A with Option
UKB
E7404A
100 kHz to 13.2 GHz
100 kHz to 13.2 GHz
9 kHz to 13.2 GHz
100 Hz to 13.2 GHz
E7404A with Option
UKB
E7405A with Option
10 MHz to 26.5 GHz
100 Hz to 26.5 GHz
UKB
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Coupling AC DC
252
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
INPut Subsystem
Clear the Input Overload
:INPut:PROTection:CLEar
Resets the overload protection circuitry for the input connector. There is no query
form of this command.
NOTE
This command is valid only for Agilent EMC model E7401A.
The excessive input signal may have caused 15 dB of attenuation to be switched
in, or it may have completely switched the input connector out so that it is
connected to the internal reference signal.
Chapter 5
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MEASure Group of Commands
MEASure Group of Commands
This group includes commands used to make measurements and return results. The
different commands can be used to provide fine control of the overall measurement
process. Most measurements should be done in single measurement mode, rather
than doing the measurement continuously.
If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory
default settings, set up the measurement with the CONFigure command. Use the
commands in the [:SENSe]subsystem to change the settings. Then use the
:READ?command, or the :INITiateand :FETCh?commands to initiate the
measurement and query the results.
Each measurement sets the instrument state that is appropriate for that
measurement. Other commands are available for each Mode to allow changing
settings such as view and limits, etc. Refer to the following command subsystems:
SENSe:<measurement>
SENSe:CHANnel
SENSe:CORRection
SENSe:FREQuency
SENSe:POWer
CALCulate:<measurement>
CALCulate:CLIMits/DATA
DISPlay:<measurement>
TRIGger
Configure Commands
:CONFigure:<measurement>
This command stops the current measurement and sets up the instrument for the
specified measurement using the factory default instrument settings. It does not
initiate the taking of measurement data. This command also turns the averaging
function on and sets the number of averages to 10 for all measurements.
The query :CONFigure?returns the current measurement name in quotes.
The CONFigure? query returns the current measurement name.
254
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MEASure Group of Commands
Fetch Commands
:FETCh:<measurement>[n]?
This command puts valid data into the output buffer, but does not initiate data
acquisition. Use the INITiate[:IMMediate] command to acquire data before you
use the FETCh command. You can only fetch results from the measurement that is
currently selected.
:FETCh <meas>?will return valid data only when the measurement is in one of
the following states:
idle
initiated
paused
If the optional [n] value is not included, or is set to 1, the scalar measurement
results will be returned. If the [n] value is set to a value other than 1, the selected
trace data results will be returned. See each command for details of what types of
scalar results or trace data results are available.
Measure Commands
:MEASure:<measurement>[n]?
MEASurecommands stop the present measurement and set up the instrument for
the specified measurement using the factory default values. Other SCPI
communication is blocked until the measurement is complete. After the data is
valid, the scalar result is returned for the specified measurement. These are the
settings and units that conform to the measurement specific standard.
•
Stops the current measurement and sets up the instrument for the specified
measurement using the factory defaults
•
•
Initiates the data acquisition for the measurement
Blocks other SCPI communication, waiting until the measurement is complete
before returning results.
•
•
Turns the averaging function on and sets the number of averages to the default
number of averages for the measurement; typically, this is 10.
After the data is valid it returns the scalar results, or the trace data, for the
specified measurement.
If the optional [n] value is not included, or is set to 1, the scalar measurement
results will be returned. If the [n] value is set to a value other than 1, the
selected trace data results will be returned. See each command for details of
what types of scalar results or trace data results are available.
If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory
default settings you can set up the measurement with the CONFigure command.
Use the commands in the SENSe:<measurement> and
CALCulate:<measurement> subsystems to change the settings. Then you can use
the READ? command, or the INITiate and FETCh? commands, to initiate the
Chapter 5
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MEASure Group of Commands
Figure 5-1
Measurement Group of Commands
If you need to repeatedly make a given measurement with settings other than the
factory defaults, you can use the commands in the SENSe:<measurement> and
CALCulate:<measurement> subsystems to set up the measurement. Then use the
READ? command or INITiate and FETCh? commands, to initiate the
measurement and query results.
Measurement settings persist if you initiate a different measurement and then
return to a previous one. Use READ:<measurement>? if you want to use those
persistent settings. If you want to go back to the default settings, use
MEASure:<measurement>?.
Read Commands
:READ:<measurement>[n]?
•
•
•
Does not preset the measurement to the factory defaults. (The MEASure? and
CONFigure? commands reset the parameters to the default values.) It uses the
settings from the last measurement.
Initiates the measurement and puts valid data into the output buffer. If a
measurement other than the current one is specified, the instrument will switch
to that measurement before it initiates the measurement and returns results.
Blocks other SCPI communication, waiting until the measurement is complete
before returning the results
If the optional [n] value is not included, or is set to 1, the scalar measurement
results will be returned. If the [n] value is set to a value other than 1, the
selected trace data results will be returned. See each command for details of
what types of scalar results or trace data results are available. The binary data
formats should be used when handling large blocks of data since they are
smaller and faster then the ASCII format.
256
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MEASure Group of Commands
Measurement settings persist if you initiate a different measurement and then
return to a previous one. Use READ:<measurement>? if you want to use those
persistent settings. If you want to go back to the default settings, use
MEASure:<measurement>?.
Get Measurement Results
:FETCH?
Returns the results of the last measurement.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by *RST or Preset
Remarks:
Only returns data if a measurement has been made. Returns the
results of the measurement as a string.
Read Command
READ?
Performs configured measurement and returns the results in a string format.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
N/A
Remarks:
Output format for measurement results of a single signal from
the Measure at Marker or Measure at Frequency keys is:
“<PEAK>, <QUASI-PEAK>, <AVG>, <FREQ’
UNCERTAINTY>, <TOTAL AMPLITUDE CORRECTION>,
<COMMENT>”
Peak and signal list measurement output is the number of
signals measured.
Configure for Measuring Frequency
:CONFigure:EMI:AFRequency <freq><unit>
:MEASure:EMI:AFRequency? <freq><unit>
Configures for/measures a given frequency.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by *RST or Preset.
Chapter 5
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MEASure Group of Commands
Measure at Marker
:CONFigure:EMI:MARKer[1|2|3|4]?
:MEASure:EMI:MARKer[1|2|3|4]?
:MEASure:MARKer?
Measures at selected marker. Loads the internal buffer.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by *RST or Preset.
Key Access:
MEASURE, Meas at Marker
Measure at Marker and Add to List
:MEASure:EMI:MARKer[1|2|3|4]ADD?
Measures at selected marker and adds to signal list.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
1
Key Access:
MEASURE, Marker to List
Setting Max/Min On or Off
:MEASure:EMI:MMIN:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:MEASure:EMI:MMIN:STATe?
Turns Max/Min View On or Off
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
Max/Min View is active when Max/Min On is selected.
Key Access:
View/Trace, More, Max/Min
Max/Min View ->Max
:MEASure:EMI:MMIN:VIEW MAX|MIN|BOTH
Selects Max trace view.
Key Access:
View/Trace, More, Max/Min View, Max
258
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MEASure Group of Commands
Measure Peaks
:CONFigure:EMI:PEAKs
:MEASure:EMI:PEAKs?
Measures all peaks on screen and adds them to the signal list.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Start
Key Access:
MEASURE, More, Auto-measure, Start/Abort
Remeasure Current Signal
:CONFigure:EMI:SLISt[CURRent]|MARKed|ALL
:MEASure:EMI:SLISt?[CURRent]MARKed|ALL
Remeasures current, marked, or all signals in the signal list.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Current
Key Access:
MEASURE, More, Signal List, Remeasure
Chapter 5
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory Subsystem
The purpose of the MMEMory subsystem is to provide access to mass storage
devices such as internal or external disk drives.
NOTE
Refer also to :CALCulateand :TRACe subsystems for more trace and limit
line commands.
Agilent EMC analyzers use two types of mass storage devices:
•
•
3.5 inch disk drive (high density, 1.44 MBytes formatted) designated “A:”
Part of flash memory and treated as a device designated “C:”
The MMEMory command syntax term <file_name>is a specifier having the
form: drive:\directory\name.ext, where the following rules apply:
•
•
•
“drive” is “A:” or “C:”
“\directory\” is the path name
“name” is a DOS file name of up to eight characters, letters (A-Z, a-z) and
numbers (0-9) only (lower case letters are read as uppercase)
•
“ext” is an optional file extension using the same rules as “name,” but consists
of up to three characters total
Catalog the Selected Memory Location
:MMEMory:CATalog? <drive>
where “drive” is “A:” or “C:”
Lists all files in the specified drive. The return data will be of the format:
<mem_used>,<mem_free>,<file_listing>
Each <file listing>indicates the name, and size of one file in the directory
list: <file_name>,<file_size>
Example:
Catalog drive C:, which is in instrument memory:
:MMEMory:CATalog? “C:”
Front Panel
Access:
File
Copy a File
:MMEMory:COPY <file_name1>,<file_name2>
To copy a file, the source file name is <file_name1> and the destination file name
is <file_name2>.
Example:
:MMEM:COPY “C:oldname.sta”,”A:\newname.sta”
260
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
File, Copy
Move Data to File
:MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<definite_length_block>
:MMEMory:DATA? <file_name>
Loads <definite_length_block>into the memory location <file_name>.
The query returns the contents of the <file_name> in the format of a definite length
block. This command can be used for copying files out of the analyzer over the
remote bus. Refer to chapter 3, Programming Examples, for more information.
Example:
Load “abcd” into C:source.txt:
:MMEM:DATA “C:source.txt”,“#14abcd”
Delete a File
:MMEMory:DELete <file_name>
Delete a file.
Example:
Remarks:
:MMEM:DEL “C:source.txt”
If <file_name> does not exist, a “File Name Error” will occur.
Front Panel
Access:
File, Delete
Load a Corrections Table from a File
:MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection
ANTenna|CABLe|OTHer|USER,<file_name>
Loads the data in the file <file_name> to the specified correction set.
Example:
:MMEM:LOAD:CORR ANT, “A:TEST5.CBL”
Front Panel
Access:
File, Load, Type, Corrections
Load a Limit Line from Memory to the Instrument
:MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2,<file_name>
Loads a limit line, from the specified file in mass storage to the instrument.
Loading a time limit line deletes any frequency limit lines. Similarly, loading a
frequency limit line deletes any time limit lines.
Example:.
Remarks:.
:MMEM:LOAD:LIM LLINE2,“C:mylimit.lim”
There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1|LLINE2.
Front Panel
Access:.
File, Load, Type, Limits
Chapter 5
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
Load an Instrument State from a File
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name>
The contents of the state file are loaded into the current instrument state.
Example:
Remarks:
:MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,“C:mystate.sta”
See also commands :MMEMory:LOAD:STATeand
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
If the revision of the state being loaded is newer than the
revision of the instrument, no state is recalled and an error is
reported.
If the revision of the state being loaded is equal to the revision of
the instrument, all regions of the state will be loaded.
If the revision of the state being loaded is older than the revision
of the instrument, the instrument will only load the older regions
of the state.
Front Panel
Access:
File, Load, Type, State
Load a Trace From a File to the Instrument
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe <file_name>
The contents of the file are loaded into TRACE1. The file name must have a file
extension of :trc or :csv. The file extension determines whether a trace is loaded,
or a trace with its state, are loaded. The :csv extension is for trace files using the
CSV (comma-separated values) format. The :trc extension is for files that include
both trace and state data.
Example:
Remarks:
:MMEM:LOAD:TRAC “C:mytrace.trc”
See also commands :MMEMory:LOAD:STATeand
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
If the revision of the state being loaded is newer than the
revision of the instrument, no state is recalled and an error is
reported.
If the revision of the state being loaded is equal to the revision of
the instrument, all regions of the state will be loaded.
If the revision of the state being loaded is older than the revision
of the instrument, the instrument will only load the older regions
of the state.
262
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
Make a Directory
:MMEMory:MDIRectory <dir_path>
where “path” is “A:\” or “C:\”
Makes a directory or subdirectory in the specified path.
Example:
Make a directory in C:\, which is in instrument memory:
:MMEMory:MDIRectory “C:\”
Front Panel
Access:
File, Create Dir
Store (Load/Save) a Signal List
:MMEMory:LOAD:SIGNallist <file_name>
:MMEMory:STORe:SIGNallist <file_name>
These commands are used to recall the signal list data from a disk or to save the
signal list data to a disk.
Example:
:MMEM:LOAD:SIGN, ‘A:myfiles.lis‘
:MMEM:STOR:SIGN, ‘A:xfiles.lis‘
Remarks:
Signal list files should be saved with a .lisextension since
this is the extension assumed by the file manager. You can save
signal list files under a different extension but you will not be
able to load these files via the front panel keys.
The load command for a signal list behaves differently than the
LOADcommand for AMPCORor limit lines. For most kinds of
instrument data the LOADcommand performs a “destructive
read”; it replaces any existing data with the data from the disk.
The :MEM:LOAD:SIGNcommand does an “additive read”; it
merges the data loaded with any data currently in the signal list.
Signal list files are stored in ASCII text files with section
markers to delineate content. The data in a signal list is stored in
the [DATA] section of the file. The contents of this section are
described in the table below.
a
Contents
Column
1
2
3
4
5
6
Row number (starts at 1)
Frequency (Hz)
Peak detector amplitude (dBmV)
Quasi-peak detector amplitude (dBmV)
Average detector amplitude (dBmV)
Total amplitude correction (dBm)
Chapter 5
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
a
Contents
Column
7
Comment (enclosed in double quotes)
Marked/unmarked state (0=unmarked, 1=marked)
Uncertainty (MHz)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Status word (used internally)
Peak delta from limit line 1
Peak delta from limit line 2
Quasi-peak delta from limit line 1
Quasi-peak delta from limit line 2
Average delta from limit line 1
Average delta from limit line 2
a. An asterisk (*) in the column indicates that the data was missing or not
applicable at the time the signal list data was saved to disk.
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save, Signal List
File, Load, Signal List
Delete a Directory
:MMEMory:RDIRectory <dir_name>
Deletes the specified directory and all files and subdirectories within that directory.
Front Panel
Access:
File, Delete
Store a Corrections Table to a File
:MMEMory:STORe:CORRection
ANTenna|CABLe|OTHer|USER,<file_name>
Stores the specified correction set to the file named <file_name>.
Example:
Remarks:
:MMEM:STOR:CORR ANT, “A:TEST1.ANT”
This command will fail if the <file_name>already exists.
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save, Type, Corrections
264
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
Store a Limit Line in a File
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2,<file_name>
Stores the specified limit line to the specified file in memory.
Example:
Remarks:
:MMEM:STOR:LIM LLINE2,“C:mylimit.lim”
This command will fail if the <file_name>already exists.
There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1|LLINE2.
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save, Type, Limits
Store Measurement Results in a File
:MMEMory:STORe:RESults <file_name>
Saves the results of the current measurement into a comma-separated file. Only
works when a measurement has been chosen from the MEASURE menu. The
filename extension is .CSV. This command will fail if the file <file_name>
already exists.
Example:
:MMEM:STOR:RES “A:ACP.CSV”
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save, Type, Measurement Results
Store a Screen Image in a Graphic File
:MMEMory:STORe:SCReen <file_name>
Saves the current instrument screen image, as a graphic file, to the specified file in
memory. The file must have a :gif or :wmf file extension. The specified file
extension determines which file format the instrument will use to save the image.
Example:
Remarks:
:MMEM:STOR:SCR “C:myscreen.gif”
This command will fail if the <file_name>already exists.
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save, Type, Screen
Store an Instrument State in a File
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<file_name>
Saves the instrument state to the file in memory.
Example:
Remarks:
:MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,“C:mystate.sta”
This command will fail if the <file_name>already exists.
Chapter 5
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
Store a Trace in a File
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe <label>,<file_name>
Saves the specified trace to a file in memory. The file name must have a file
extension of :trc or :csv. The file extension determines whether a trace is stored,
or a trace with its state, are stored. The :csv extension is for trace files using the
CSV (comma-separated values) format. The :trc extension is for files that include
both trace and state data.
Example:
Range:
:MMEM:STOR:TRAC TRACE3,“C:mytrace.trc”
Trace labels are: TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|ALL
This command will fail if the <file_name>already exists.
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save, Type, Trace
266
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
OUTPut Subsystem
OUTPut Subsystem
The OUTPut subsystem controls the characteristics of the tracking generator
that control the characteristics of the tracking generator.
Turn Output On/Off
:OUTPut[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:OUTPut[:STATe]?
Controls the tracking generator output.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amplitude On Off
Chapter 5
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SENSe Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem
Sets the instrument state parameters so that you can measure the input signal.
SENSe subsystem commands used for measurements in the MEASURE and Meas
Setup menus may only be used to set parameters of a specific measurement when
the measurement is active. Otherwise, an error will occur. You must first select the
appropriate measurement using the :CONFigure:<measurement>command.
If a :SENSecommand is used to change a parameter during a measurement
(while not in its idle state), the measurement will be restarted.
268
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:AVERage Subsection
[:SENSe]:AVERage Subsection
Clear the Current Average
[:SENSe]:AVERage:CLEar
Re-start the trace averaging function.
NOTE
Re-start the trace at the beginning of a sweep to obtain valid average data. To
do this, remotely abort the sweep and initiate a single sweep.
Set the Average Count
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt <integer>
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt?
Specifies the number of measurements that are combined.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
100
Range:
1 to 8192
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Average On Off
Turn Averaging On/Off
[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe]?
This command toggles averaging off and on. Averaging combines the value of
successive measurements to average out measurement variations.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
When a measurement under the front panel MEASURE key is
started, this command is turned off for video averaging
([:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE VIDeo). If this command is
turned on for video averaging when any of the MEASURE key
measurements are in progress, that measurement will be
stopped.
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Average On Off
Chapter 5
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:AVERage Subsection
Turn Automatic Averaging On/Off
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO?
Sets the averaging to be automatically set to the appropriate type for the current
measurement setup. Or allows you to manually choose the type of averaging with
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE.
When AUTO is On:
If the Y Axis Scale is not Linear or Log, then average type is Video (Y Axis
Scale) Averaging.
If the Y Axis Scale is Linear or Log, then average type is Power Averaging.
If the Detector is Peak, Sample, or Negative Peak (not Average), then average
type is Video Average.
Figure 5-2
Auto Rules for Average Type
270
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:AVERage Subsection
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Avg Type, Auto Man
Type of Averaging for Measurements
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE VIDeo|RMS
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?
Successive measurements of data can be combined to average out measurement
variations. Detector is set to average and Avg type is set to power (RMS) to
measure RMS voltage (avg power).
NOTE
As a best practice, set amplitude scale (:DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC) prior to
average type.
VIDeologarithmically averages the power of the video data (typical units are
dBm). This command is equivalent to pressing front panel keys BW/Avg, Avg
Type, Video.
RMSaverages the linear power of successive measurements (typical units are
watts).
The following parameters of this command are supported, but not recommended
for new designs. They are provided for limited compatibility to other analyzers.
When used, the parameters are converted as follows:
TYPE LINear maps to RMS.
TYPE LPOWer maps to VIDeo.
TYPE POWer maps to RMS.
TYPE SCALar and VOLTage will map to VIDeo. If the amplitude scale is LOG, the
setting is allowed, but an error is generated.
TYPE LOG maps to VIDeo. If the amplitude scale is not LOG (linear or Y Axis Units
= Hz), the setting is allowed, but an error is generated.
For compatibility with firmware revisions prior to A.08.00, query
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?will return LPOW or POW if LPOW or POW is used
during the setting and no further changes have occurred to set the average type (such as
from the front panel).
Factory Preset
and *RST:
VID
History:
Changed with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Avg Type
Chapter 5
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection
Resolution Bandwidth
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <freq>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]?
Specifies the resolution bandwidth.
Example:
Range:
BAND 1 kHz
10 Hz to 5 MHz (with Option 1DR)
1 Hz to 5 MHz (E7401A, E7402A, E7403A, E7404A, E7405A
with Option 1D5)
Default Unit:
Hz
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Resolution BW Auto Man
Resolution Bandwidth Automatic
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO?
Couples the resolution bandwidth.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Example:
History:
On
BWID:AUTO On
This command function changed with firmware revision
A.08.00. With :AUTO ONin zero span, an error will be
generated.
Remarks:
Auto-couple resolution bandwidth is not available in zero span.
Resolution Bandwidth Mode
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE EMI|SAN|OFF
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:MODE?
Couples the resolution bandwidth to the frequency span in SAN mode, to Center
Frequency in EMI mode, or uncoupled when OFF.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
EMI
272
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection
Video Bandwidth
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <freq>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo?
Specifies the video bandwidth.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
300 kHz
Range:
1 Hz to 3 MHz. This range is dependent upon the setting of
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]and
installed options.
Default Unit:
Hz
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Video BW Auto Man
Video Bandwidth Automatic
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO?
Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Video BW Auto Man
Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <number>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio?
Specifies the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
3.0
Range:
0.00001 to 3.0e6
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, VBW/RBW Ratio
Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio Mode Select
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO?
Selects auto or manual mode for video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio.
Chapter 5
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection
auto rules.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, VBW/RBW, Auto Man
Figure 5-3
VBW and RBW Ratio Auto Rules
274
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection
Resolution Bandwidth Type
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:TYPE IMPulse|DB6|DB3
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:TYPE?
Selects the type of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth (RBW) used. FCC regulations
specify a 6 dB, 1 MHz resolution bandwidth for measurements greater than 1 GHz.
CISPR regulations (1999) specify a 1 MHz impulse resolution bandwidth.
Spectrum analyzers use a 3 dB resolution bandwidth.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
IMPulse
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, 1 MHz BW Type
Chapter 5
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
Delete All Corrections
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete
This command deletes all existing corrections.
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Delete All Corrections
Perform Amplitude Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe]?
Turns On or Off the amplitude corrections. When turned On, only the correction
sets that were turned on are enabled. When turned Off, all of the correction sets are
disabled.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
To turn On or Off an individual correction set, use:
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4[:STATe].
Front Panel
Access:
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Antenna, Correction On
Off
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Cable, Correction On Off
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Other, Correction On Off
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, User, Correction On Off
Set Amplitude Correction Data
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA
<freq>,<rel_ampl>{,<freq>,<rel_ampl>}
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA?
Sets the amplitude correction data. These frequency/amplitude corrections will be
applied to the displayed data to correct for system losses/gains outside the
analyzer. Four different sets of correction data can be stored.
Example:
:CORR:CSET1:DATA
900E6,0.3,1.0E9,0.35,1.3E9,0.2
Range:
200 points per set
276
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
Default Unit:
Remarks:
There are no units on the frequency and amplitude pairs. They
must be entered in hertz (Hz) and decibels (dB).
CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are
as follows:
CSET or CSET1 is Antenna
CSET2 is Cable
CSET3 is Other
CSET4 is User
Front Panel
Access:
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Antenna, Edit
Point|Frequency|Amplitude|Delete Point
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Cable, Edit
Point|Frequency|Amplitude|Delete Point
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Other, Edit
Point|Frequency|Amplitude|Delete Point
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, User, Edit
Point|Frequency|Amplitude|Delete Point
Merge Additional Values into the Existing
Amplitude Correction Data
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA:MERGe
<freq>,<rel_ampl>{,<freq>,<rel_ampl>}
Adds the points with the specified values to the current amplitude correction data,
allowing you to merge correction data. If too much data is merged, as many points
as possible are merged into the existing data and then an error is reported.
• <freq>is the frequency (in Hz) where the correction should be applied; no
unit is allowed in this parameter
• <rel_ampl>is the amount of relative amplitude correction (in dB) needed; no
unit is allowed in this parameter
Remarks:
CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are
as follows:
CSET or CSET1 is Antenna
CSET2 is Cable
CSET3 is Other
CSET4 is User
Chapter 5
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
Delete Amplitude Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DELete
Deletes the specified correction set. If the set was On, it is turned Off.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Corrections,
Antenna|Cable|Other|User, Delete Correction
Set Amplitude Correction Frequency Interpolation
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:X:SPACing
LINear|LOGarithmic
Sets the frequency interpolation to linear or logarithmic for the specified correction
set.
Remarks:
Logarithmic frequency scale corrections are linearly
interpolated between correction points with respect to the
logarithm of the frequency. Linear frequency scale corrections
are interpolated along straight lines, connecting adjacent points
on a linear scale.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Corrections, Freq Interp Log Lin
Perform Amplitude Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4[:STATe]?
Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the given set.
NOTE
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe]must be on for this command to
function.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are
as follows:
CSET or CSET1 is Antenna
CSET2 is Cable
CSET3 is Other
CSET4 is User
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Corrections,
Antenna|Cable|Other|User, Correction On Off
278
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
Input Impedance Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude] <number>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude]?
Amplitude correction is applied to the display data to adjust for measurement
situations where the unit under test has a different impedance than the 50Ω input
impedance of the analyzer.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is the input impedance of the analyzer.
Range:
50 or 75 ohms
ohms
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
Input, Input Z Corr 50 Ω 75 Ω
External Amplifier Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude] <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude]?
A single value of amplitude correction can be applied to the displayed trace data to
compensate for signal losses or gains that are due to other devices in the
measurement setup, rather than the unit under test.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0 dB
Range:
–81.9 to 81.9
dB
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Ext Amp Gain
Chapter 5
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:DEMod Subsection
[:SENSe]:DEMod Subsection
Type of Demodulation
[:SENSe]:DEMod AM|FM
[:SENSe]:DEMod?
Sets the type of demodulation.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
AM
Front Panel
Access:
Det/Demod, Demod, AM
Det/Demod, Demod, FM
FM Deviation
[:SENSe]:DEMod:FMDeviation <freq>
[:SENSe]:DEMod:FMDeviation?
Sets the total FM frequency deviation for full screen demodulation.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
100 kHz
Range:
5 kHz to 1.2 MHz
Hz
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE, Scale/Div
Squelch
[:SENSe]:DEMod:SQUelch <integer>
Sets the squelch level on FM demod.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
integer, 0 to 100
Key Access:
Det/Demod, Demod/Audio, Squelch
280
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:DEMod Subsection
Demodulation Control
[:SENSe]:DEMod:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:DEMod:STATe?
Turns demodulation on or off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
Det/Demod, Demod, Off
Demod Time
[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME <time>
[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME?
Sets the time used for frequency domain demodulation.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
500 ms
Range:
2 ms to 100 s
seconds
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
Det/Demod, Demod, Demod Time
Demod View
[:SENSe]:DEMod:VIEW[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:DEMod:VIEW[:STATe]?
This command causes the demodulated signal to be displayed. If FM Demod is on,
then the display scales the y-axis in units of kHz. The scale/div is set with the
command :DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y
[:SCALe]:PDIVision:FREQuency <freq>if FM Demod is on. If FM
Demod is on, then several functions are not available; these include: Log/Lin
(display is always in linear), Y-Axis Units, Marker Search functions, Normalize,
Display Line, Peak Excursion, and Peak Threshold. There is no effect when AM
demodulation is used (only applicable for FM demodulation).
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
This command is not available when Demod is set to Off.
Front Panel
Access:
Det/Demod, Demod, FM, Demod View
Chapter 5
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
Automatic Detection Type Selected
[:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO?
Switches automatically to the optimum detection type for typical measurements
using the current instrument settings.
The detector type is average if any of these are on:
Noise marker
Band power markers
Trace averaging when the Average Type is Power (RMS).
The detector type is sample if any of the following conditions are true:
Trace averaging is on with average type of video
Both max and min hold trace modes are on
Resolution bandwidth is less than 1 kHz, and noise marker, band power
markers, or trace averaging is on
The detector type is negative peak if any trace is in min hold and no traces are in
max hold.
The detector type is peak if the above conditions are off.
Manually changing the detector function turns Auto off.
determined.
282
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
Det/Demod, Detector
Type of Detection
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle|AVERage|RMS
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]?
Specifies the detection mode.
For each trace interval (bucket), average detection displays the average of all the
samples within the interval. The averaging can be done using two methods:
the power method (RMS)
the video method (Y Axis Units)
The method is controlled by the BW/Avg, Avg Type key.
NOTE
The combination of the average detector and the power average type is equivalent
to what is sometimes referred to as “RMS detection.”
Negative peak detection displays the lowest sample taken during the interval
being displayed.
Positive peak detection displays the highest sample taken during the interval
being displayed.
Sample detection displays the sample taken during the interval being displayed,
and is used primarily to display noise or noise-like signals. In sample mode, the
instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed into memory.
This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude
measurement of non noise-like signals.
Average detection is used when measuring the average value of the amplitude
across each trace interval (bucket). The averaging method used by the average
detector is set to either video or power as appropriate when the average type is
auto coupled.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Positive
History:
Added Average and RMS elements to the command with
firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
Det/Demod, Detector
Det/Demod, Detector, Peak
Det/Demod, Detector, Sample
284
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
Det/Demod, Detector, Negative Peak
Det/Demod, Detector, Average
Type of EMI Detector
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]: EMI QPEak|AVERage|OFF
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]:EMI?
Specifies the type of EMI detection mode. Quasi-peak detection displays a
weighted, sample-detected amplitude using specific, charge, discharge, and meter
time constants as described in CISPR Publication 16. Average detection displays
the average value of a sample-detected amplitude.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
When either of the EMI detectors are selected for the first time,
a ranging operation is performed which adjusts the reference
level to a reasonable level for performing measurements.
The ranging operation will first adjust the reference level in
LOGarithmic scale units and then in LINear scale units. While
doing so, “EMIPk” will be displayed in the upper-left corner of
the display.
Once the reference level has been properly adjusted, the selected
EMI detector will be activated. Depending on the detector
chosen, “EMI QP” or “EMIAv” will be displayed in the
upper-left display corner.
When setting the EMI detector to Off, the analyzer performs an
UNRange and will display the various instrument settings
adjusted by the range operation. The previous detector is also
restored.
When the QPeak or AVERage EMI detectors are selected, the
detector setting is locked in SAMPle mode and the user is not
allowed to adjust this value until the EMI detector is set to Off.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, EMI Detector, Quasi Peak
Det/Demod, EMI Detector, EMI Average
Det/Demod, EMI Detector, Off
Chapter 5
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
EMI View
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]EMI:VIEW POSitive|EMI
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]EMI:VIEW?
Selects between Quasi-Peak/Average EMI detector mode or Peak detector mode
without reranging. When POSitive is selected only the peak detector is used. When
EMI is selected, the previously selected EMI detector is used.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
EMI
Remarks:
This command is not available when the EMI detector is Off.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, EMI Detector, View
Range Immediate
[:SENSe]:DETector:RANGe:IMMediate
[:SENSe]:DETector:RANGe:IMMediate
Performs detector ranging (if enabled) when an EMI detector is selected.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Positive
Unrange
[:SENSe]:DETector[:UNRange]
Restores settings prior to last range operation.
286
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:EMI Subsection
[:SENSe]:EMI Subsection
Auto Measure Average On or Off
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage[STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage?
Sets auto measure On or Off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
Determines if the average detector is measured (by auto
measure, measure at marker, measure frequency, or remeasure).
Key Access:
MEASURE, More, Auto Measure
Auto Measure Peak On or Off
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:PPEak[STATe]OFF|ON|0|1|
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:PPEak?
Sets automeasure peak On or Off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
Determines if the peak detector is measured (by auto measure,
measure at marker, measure frequency, or remeasure).
Key Access:
MEASURE, More, Auto Measure
Auto Measure Quasi Peak On or Off
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:QPEak[STATe]OFF|ON|0|1|
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:QPEak?
Sets automeasure quasi peak On or Off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
Determines if the quasi-peak detector is measured (by auto
measure, measure at marker, measure frequency, or remeasure).
Key Access:
MEASURE, More, Auto Measure
Chapter 5
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:EMI Subsection
Setting the Dwell Time for Peak
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:PPEak:DWELl<time>
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:PPEak:DWELl?
Sets the dwell time for the peak detector for Measure at Marker, Automeasure, and
Remeasure.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
Sets the dwell time
Setting the Dwell Time for Quasi Peak
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:QPEak:DWELl<time>
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:QPEak:DWELl?
Sets the dwell time for the quasi-peak detector for Measure at Marker,
Automeasure, and Remeasure.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
Sets the dwell time
Setting the Dwell Time for Average Peak
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage:DWELl<time>
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage:DWELl?
Sets the dwell time for the average detector for Measure at Marker, Automeasure,
and Remeasure.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
Sets the dwell time
Preselector Centering On or Off (E7403A, E7404A, E7405A only)
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PCENter[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PCENter[:STATe]?
Determines if preselector centering should be performed prior to Measure at
Marker, Automeasure, and Remeasure.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
Available on Agilent E7403A, E7404A, and E7405A only.
288
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:EMI Subsection
Setting the Dwell Time for Range
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:RANGe:DWELl<time>
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:RANGe:DWELl?
Sets the dwell time for ranging for Measure at Marker, Automeasure, and
Remeasure.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
200 ms
Auto Measure Margin On or Off
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PEAKs:SGTMargin[:STATe]ON|OFF|1|0
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PEAKs:SGTMargin?
Sets automeasure margin On or Off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Remarks:
If on when automeasuring, only the signals above the margin are
measured and added to the signal list.
Key Access:
MEASURE, More, Auto Measure
Chapter 5
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
Center Frequency
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer UP|DOWN
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?
Set the center frequency.
NOTE
In log sweep mode, the minimum start frequency is 10 Hz.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
600 MHz
Range:
EMC E7401A: –80 MHz1 to 1.58 GHz
Default Unit:
Hz
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, Center Freq
Center Frequency Step Size Automatic
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO?
Specifies whether the step size is set automatically based on the span.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, CF Step Auto Man
1. 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode.
290
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
Center Frequency Step Size
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?
Specifies the center frequency step size.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Span/10
Range:
Maximum negative frequency to the maximum positive
frequency listed below:
EMC E7401A: –1.58 to 1.58 GHz
EMC E7402A: –3.10 to 3.10 GHz
EMC E7403A: –6.78 to 6.78 GHz
EMC E7404A: –13.3 to 13.3 GHz
EMC E7405A: –27.0 to 27.0 GHz
Hz
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, CF Step Man
Frequency Span
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN?
Set the frequency span. Setting the span to 0 Hz puts the analyzer into zero span.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
800 MHz
Range:
EMC E7401A: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 1.58 GHz
EMC E7402A: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 3.10 GHz
EMC E7403A: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 6.78 GHz
EMC E7404A: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 13.3 GHz
EMC E7405A: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 27.0 GHz
Hz
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
SPAN/X Scale, Span
SPAN/X Scale, Zero Span
Chapter 5
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
Full Frequency Span
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
Set the frequency span to full scale.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
800 MHz
Front Panel
Access:
SPAN/X Scale, Full Span
Last Frequency Span
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious
Set the frequency span to the previous span setting.
Front Panel
Access:
SPAN/X Scale, Last Span
Start Frequency
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt?
Set the start frequency.
NOTE
In log sweep mode, the minimum start frequency is 10 Hz.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
200 MHz
Range:
EMC E7401A: –80 MHz1 to 1.58 GHz
Default Unit:
Hz
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, Start Freq
1. 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode.
292
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
Stop Frequency
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP?
Set the stop frequency.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
1.06 GHz
Range:
EMC E7401A: –80 MHz1 to 1.58 GHz
Default Unit:
Hz
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, Stop Freq
Frequency Synthesis Mode
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis 1|2|3
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis?
This command switches between two phase noise optimization modes. Mode 2
optimizes the analyzer for close-in phase noise. Mode 3 optimizes the analyzer for
tuning speed. Mode 1 is not recommended for new designs.
This command is available for the following models only:
E7402A, E7403A, E7404A, E7405A
Factory Preset
and *RST:
3
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
AUTO COUPLE, PhNoise Opt
1. 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode.
Chapter 5
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
Frequency Synthesis State
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis:AUTO?
This command switches between auto and manual phase noise selection.
When in auto mode, the phase noise optimization is set as follows:
•
•
For spans ≤ 10 MHz, the analyzer is optimized for phase noise.
For spans > 10 MHz, the analyzer is optimized for fast tuning.
This command is available for the following models only:
E7402A, E7403A, E7404A, E7405A
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
AUTO COUPLE, PhNoise Opt
294
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:POWer Subsection
[:SENSe]:POWer Subsection
Enable/Disable QPD X10 Gain
[:SENSe]:POWer:QPGain[:STATe]ON|OFF|1|0
[:SENSe]:POWer:QPGain[:STATe]?
Sets the quasi peak (QP) gain state On or Off in the quasi peak detector (QPD)
board.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Key Access:
Det/Demod, EMI Detector, AV/QP Gain X1 X10
Input Attenuation
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?
Set the input attenuator. This value is set at its auto value if input attenuation is set
to auto.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
10 dB
Range:
EMC E7401A: 0 to 60 dB
EMC E7402A: 0 to 75 dB
EMC E7403A: 0 to 75 dB
EMC E7404A: 0 to 75 dB
EMC E7405A: 0 to 65 dB
dB
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Attenuation Auto Man
Input Port Attenuator Auto
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?
Select the input port attenuator range to be set either automatically or manually.
On – Input attenuation is automatically set as determined by the Reference
Level Setting.
Off – Input attenuation is manually set
Chapter 5
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:POWer Subsection
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale, Attenuation
Input Port Power Gain
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]?
Turns the internal preamp on or off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Int Preamp On Off
Input Port Maximum Mixer Power
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <ampl>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]?
Specifies the maximum power at the input mixer.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
−10 dBm
Range:
–100 dBm to 10 dBm
dBm
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Max Mixer Lvl
Optimize Preselector Frequency
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust <freq>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust?
This command allows user-defined adjustment of the preselector frequency to
optimize its response on the signal of interest.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0 Hz
Range:
–250 MHz to 250 MHz
Default Unit:
None. Use the MHz terminator in order for this command to
work.
296
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:POWer Subsection
Remarks:
This command is available only on Agilent EMC models
E7403A, E7404A, and E7405A. Use this command for signals
close to the noise level, multiple signals close together, or for
other conditions when the preselector is not tuned to the
frequency of interest.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Presel Adjust
Preselector Center
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter
This command centers the preselector filter at the signal of interest. This command
has no effect if it is activated in non-preselected bands. This command is usable
from 3 GHz to the maximum frequency of the analyzer.
NOTE
This command is available only on Agilent EMC models E7403A, E7404A, and
E7405A. This command has no effect with markers set to less than 3 GHz.
Remarks:
A peak search will be done if no marker is on.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Presel Center
Chapter 5
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Sweep Points
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts <number of points>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts?
This command sets the number of sweep points.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Example:
History:
401
:SWEep:POIN 401
This command is available only on analyzers with firmware
revision A.04.00 and later. Analyzers with firmware revisions
prior to A.04.00 have the number of sweep points fixed at 401.
Range:
101 to 8192, (2 to 8192 in zero span for analyzers with firmware
revision A.05.00 and later)
Remarks:
For analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A.08.00, any
change to sweep points sets the following commands as shown:
:CALCulate:LLINe1:DISPlay to off, and
:CALCulate:LLINe2:DISPlay to off.
Whenever the number of sweep points change, the following
functions are affected:
•
•
•
•
All trace data is erased
Any traces in view mode will go to blank mode
Sweep time is re-calculated
Any limit lines that are on will be turned off (For analyzers
with firmware revisions prior to A.08.00)
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Points
Set Frequency Domain Scale Type
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing?
Selects either linear or logarithmic for the frequency domain (X-axis) scale. The
trace query of comma-separated values maps frequency/amplitude pairs for the
mathematical interpolation of the log frequency axis. The value of
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINtsis adjusted to reflect the acquisition of data for the
given sweep span when log sweep spacing is enabled.
298
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Linear
Remarks:
Refer to the User’s Guide for detailed information on the
interactions of this command with other functions.
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY, Scale Type
Sweep Time
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME <time>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME?
Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the display.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
120.8 ms
Range:
The range depends upon the installed options, number of sweep
points, and firmware revision of your instrument. See “Sweep
Time Range” in the Specifications Guide for details.
Default Unit:
Remarks:
seconds
A span value of 0 Hz causes the analyzer to enter zero span
mode. In zero span the X-axis represents time rather than
frequency. In this mode, the sweep time may be set to faster
values when Option AYX is installed.
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Sweep Time Auto Man
Automatic Sweep Time
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?
Automatically selects the fastest sweep time for the current settings.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
History:
This command function changed with firmware revision
A.08.00. With :AUTO ONin zero span, an error will be
generated.
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Sweep Time Auto Man
Chapter 5
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Sweep Time Mode
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:MODE SRESponse|SANalyzer
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:MODE?
Specifies the type of automatic coupling for the fastest sweep time at the current
settings.
Stimulus response
Spectrum analyzer
Factory Preset
and *RST:
SANalyzer
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Sweep Coupling SR SA
Time Gating Delay (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:DELay <time>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:DELay?
Sets the delay time from when the gate trigger occurs to when the gate opens. This
is for EDGEtriggering only.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
1 µs
Range:
0.3 µs to 429 seconds
Default Unit:
seconds
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Gate Setup, Edge Setup, Gate Delay
Time Gate Length (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LENGth <time>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LENGth?
Specifies the gate time length in seconds; for EDGEtriggering only.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
1 µs
Range:
0.3 µs to 429 seconds
Default Unit:
seconds
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Gate Setup, Edge Setup, Gate Length
300
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Time Gate Level (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LEVel HIGH|LOW
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LEVel?
Selects the level of the gate signal; this command is for LEVel triggering only.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
High
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Gate Setup, Level Setup
Time Gate Polarity (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:POLarity NEGative|POSitive
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:POLarity?
Selects the polarity of the gate signal; this command is for EDGE triggering only.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Positive
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Gate, Edge Gate, Slope Pos Neg
Preset Time Gate (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:PRESet
Presets the time-gated spectrum analysis capability.
Remarks:
This command resets gate parameters to default values, as
follows:
Gate trigger type = edge
Gate polarity = positive
Gate delay = 1 µs
Gate length = 1 µs
Gate level = high
Control Time Gate (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE[:STATe]?
Turns time gating on or off.
NOTE
Time gate cannot be turned on if external trigger delay is on.
Chapter 5
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Gate, Gate On Off
Time Gate Trigger Type (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:TYPE LEVel|EDGE
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:TYPE?
Selects between edge and level mode for time-gated spectrum analysis.
Level triggers the gate when the signal surpasses a specific level, set to either
low or high.
Edge triggers the gate when the edge of a signal is encountered, set to either a
negative-going edge or a positive-going edge.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Edge
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Gate, Gate Control Edge Level
302
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SOURce Subsystem
SOURce Subsystem
¶The SOURce subsystem controls the signal characteristics of the tracking
command that controls the tracking generator output.
Sets the Output Power Offset Correction
:SOURce:CORRection:OFFSet <rel_ampl>
:SOURce:CORRection:OFFSet?
Specifies an offset for the displayed output power level. An offset power level can
be added to the displayed level to compensate for system losses (for example,
cable loss) or gains (for example, preamplifier gain.) This offset does not change
the power out of the source, it only changes the display so that it reads out the
actual power delivered to the device under test.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0 dB
Range:
–327.6 dB to 327.6 dB
Currently selected source power units
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amptd Offset
Source Attenuation
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation <ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation?
Attenuates the source output level. Specifically setting
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation <ampl>sets the mode to manual
(:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF).
CAUTION
When source attenuation is set to manual
(:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF), source amplitude may be set to
values beyond actual output levels to accommodate the full range of analyzer
capabilities. Therefore, exercise caution when connecting a power-level sensitive
device to the tracking generator output.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
EMC E7401A: 0 dB
EMC E7402A: 8 dB
EMC E7403A: 8 dB
EMC E7404A: 8 dB
Chapter 5
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SOURce Subsystem
EMC E7405A: 8 dB
Range:
EMC E7401A: 0 dB to 60 dB in 10 dB steps
EMC E7402A: 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps
EMC E7403A: 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps
EMC E7404A: 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps
EMC E7405A: 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps
dB
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Attenuation Auto Man
Automatic Source Attenuation
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO?
Selects if the source output level attenuator will be set automatically, or manually.
CAUTION
Power-level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be
accidentally damaged. This is because the actual source amplitude may be greater
than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer when the source attenuation is set
manually.
When source attenuation is set to manual
(:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF), source amplitude may be set to
values beyond actual output levels to accommodate the full range of analyzer
capabilities. Therefore, exercise caution when connecting a power-level sensitive
device to the tracking generator output.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Attenuation Auto Man
Sets the Output Power
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <ampl>
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] UP|DOWN
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]?
Specifies the source output power level. Use :SOURce:POWer:SWEepto set the
change in power level across the sweep. Also see :SOURce:POWer:STARt and
OUTPut[:STATe].
304
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SOURce Subsystem
CAUTION
Power-level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be
accidentally damaged. This is because the actual source amplitude may be greater
than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer when the source attenuation is set
manually.
When source attenuation is set to manual
(:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF), source amplitude may be set to
values beyond actual output levels to accommodate the full range of analyzer
capabilities. Therefore, exercise caution when connecting a power-level sensitive
device to the tracking generator output.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
97 dBµV
Range:
EMC E7401A: 37 dBµV to 110 dBµV
EMC E7402A: 41 dBµV to 110 dBµV
EMC E7403A: 41 dBµV to 110 dBµV
EMC E7404A: 41 dBµV to 110 dBµV
EMC E7405A: 41 dBµV to 110 dBµV
dBm
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amplitude On Off
Sets the Source Output Power Mode
:SOURce:POWer:MODE FIXed|SWEep
:SOURce:POWer:MODE?
Sets the source output to be at a single amplitude (fixed) or to sweep through a
range of power levels.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Fixed
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Power Sweep On Off
Set the Source Sweep Power Range
:SOURce:POWer:SPAN <rel_ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:SPAN?
Specifies the range of power levels through which the source output will sweep.
Use :SOURce:POWer:STARtto set the power level at the start of the power
sweep. This command is equivalent to :SOURce:POWer:SWEep.
Chapter 5
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SOURce Subsystem
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0 dB
Range:
0 dB to 20 dB
dB
Default Unit:
Set the Output Power at the Start of the Sweep
:SOURce:POWer:STARt <ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:STARt?
Specifies the source output power level at the start of the power sweep. Use
:SOURce:POWer:SPANto set the change in power level across the sweep. This
command is equivalent to
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude].
CAUTION
Power-level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be
accidentally damaged. This is because the actual source amplitude may be greater
than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer when the source attenuation is set
manually.
When source attenuation is set to manual
(:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF), source amplitude may be set to
values beyond actual output levels to accommodate the full range of analyzer
capabilities. Therefore, exercise caution when connecting a power-level sensitive
device to the tracking generator output.
Set the Output Power to Step Automatically
:SOURce:POWer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:SOURce:POWer:STEP:AUTO?
Specifies the source power step size to be one vertical scale division when in
logarithmic scale, or 10 dB when in linear scale.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
On
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amptd Step Auto Man
Set the Output Power Step Size
:SOURce:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] <ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]?
Specifies the source power step size.
Default Unit:
dB
306
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SOURce Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amptd Step Auto Man
Set the Source Sweep Power Range
:SOURce:POWer:SWEep <rel_ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:SWEep?
Specifies the range of power levels through which the source output will sweep.
Use :SOURce:POWer:STARtto set the power level at the start of the power
sweep. See also :SOURce:POWer:SPAN.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0 dB
Range:
0 dB to 20 dB
dB
Default Unit:
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Power Sweep On Off
Output Power Tracking
:SOURce:POWer:TRCKing <integer>
:SOURce:POWer:TRCKing?
Adjusts the tracking of the source output with the spectrum analyzer sweep in the
present resolution bandwidth.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
This command is persistent. The term persistent means that the
command retains the setting previously selected, even through a
power cycle.
Range:
Integer, 0 to 4095
Remarks:
This command is not needed with the 1.5 GHz tracking
generator.
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Man Track Adj
Output Power Tracking Peak
:SOURce:POWer:TRCKing:PEAK
Automatically adjusts the tracking of the source output with the spectrum analyzer
sweep so that the power is maximized for the present resolution bandwidth.
Remarks:.
This command is not applicable for the 1.5 GHz tracking
generator.
Front Panel
Access:.
Source, Tracking Peak
Chapter 5
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus Subsystem
STATus Subsystem
The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI-defined status-reporting structures.
Operation Condition Query
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Status Operation
Condition register.
NOTE
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Operation Enable
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle<integer>
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition Register will set
bits in the Operation Event register, which also sets the Operation Status Summary
bit (bit 7) in the Status Byte Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the
decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
NOTE
Preset sets all bits in this enable register to 0. To have any Operation Events
reported to the Status Byte Register, 1 or more bits must be set to 1.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Operation Event Query
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Operation Event
register.
NOTE
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a
condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is
cleared.
308
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus Subsystem
Operation Negative Transition
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set
the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when that bit has a negative
transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the
bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Operation Positive Transition
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set
the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when that bit has a positive
transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the
bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Preset the Status Byte
:STATus:PRESet
Sets bits in most of the enable and transition registers to their default state. It
presets all the Transition Filters, Enable Registers, and the Error/Event Queue
Enable. It has no effect on Event Registers, Error/Event Queue ESE, and SRE
Registers as described in IEEE Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes,
Formats, Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std
488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
Chapter 5
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
This subsection controls the SCPI-defined status-reporting structures.
Questionable Calibration Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Calibration Condition register.
NOTE
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Questionable Calibration Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition
Register will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register, which also sets
the Calibration Summary bit (bit 8) in the Questionable Register. The variable
<integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Calibration Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Calibration Event register.
NOTE
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a
condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is
cleared.
310
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Calibration Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition
register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event
register when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is
the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Calibration Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition
register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event
register when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is
the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Condition register.
NOTE
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Chapter 5
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition Register will
set bits in the Questionable Event register, which also sets the Questionable Status
Summary bit (bit3) in the Status Byte Register. The variable <integer> is the sum
of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
NOTE
The preset condition is to have all bits in this enable register set to 0. To have any
Questionable Events reported to the Status Byte Register, 1 or more bits need to be
set to 1. The Status Byte Event Register should be queried after each measurement
to check the Questionable Status Summary (bit 3). If it is equal to 1, a condition
during the test made the test results invalid. If it is equal to 0, this indicates that no
hardware problem or measurement problem was detected by the analyzer.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Event register.
NOTE
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a
condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is
cleared.
Questionable Frequency Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Frequency Condition register.
NOTE
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
312
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Frequency Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition
Register will set bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register, which also sets
the Frequency Summary bit (bit 5) in the Questionable Register. The variable
<integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Frequency Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Frequency Event register.
NOTE
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a
condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is
cleared.
Questionable Frequency Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition
register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register
when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of
the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Chapter 5
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Frequency Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition
register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register
when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of
the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Integrity Condition register.
NOTE
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Questionable Integrity Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition
Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register, which also sets
the Integrity Summary bit (bit 9) in the Questionable Register. The variable
<integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Integrity Event register.
NOTE
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a
condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is
cleared.
314
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Integrity Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition
register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register
when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of
the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition
register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register
when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of
the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle
<integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated
Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event
register, which also sets the Data Uncalibrated Summary bit (bit 3) in the
Questionable Integrity Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal
values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
Integer, 0 to 32767
Chapter 5
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Integrity Uncalibrated Event register.
NOTE
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a
condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is
cleared.
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition
<integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated
Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity
Uncalibrated Event register when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The
variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to
enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0
Range:
integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition
<integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated
Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity
Uncalibrated Event register when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The
variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to
enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
integer, 0 to 32767
316
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will
set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when that bit has a
negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values
of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0
Range:
integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Power Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Power Condition register.
NOTE
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Questionable Power Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle?>
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition
Register will set bits in the Questionable Power Event register, which also sets the
Power Summary bit (bit 3) in the Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is
the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Power Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Power Event register.
NOTE
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a
condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is
cleared.
Chapter 5
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Power Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition
register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register
when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of
the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
0
Range:
integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Power Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition
register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register
when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of
the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will
set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when that bit has a
positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values
of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
32767 (all 1’s)
Range:
integer, 0 to 32767
318
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem Subsystem
This subsystem is used to set the controls and parameters associated with the
overall system communication. These functions are not related to instrument
performance.
GPIB Address
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[1][:SELF]:ADDRess <integer>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[1][:SELF]:ADDRess?
Sets and queries the GPIB address.
NOTE
This command applies to analyzers having the standard GPIB I/O interface Option
A4H. Only one GPIB I/O interface Option A4H can be installed in an instrument.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
It is set to 18 by :SYSTem:PRESet:PERSistent, which sets
the persistent state values to their factory defaults.
This command is persistent. The term persistent means that the
command retains the setting previously selected, even through a
power cycle.
Range:
Integer, 0 to 30
Front Panel
Access:
System, Remote Port
Serial Port DTR Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:CONTrol:DTR OFF|ON|IBFull
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:CONTrol:DTR?
Sets the hardware pacing scheme. Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an
instrument.
Off - holds the DTR line in the unasserted (off) condition
On - holds the DTR line in the asserted (on) condition
IBFull - selects the input buffer full mode for the DTR line. The IBFull
parameter sets the DTR line to indicate when the device is ready to receive.
When the number of received bytes in the input buffer of the device reaches the
stop threshold, the device will unassert the DTR line. When the number of
bytes has been reduced to the start threshold, the device will assert DTR
indicating that it can receive input again. The device will also monitor the state
of CTS and will stop transmission if the line becomes unasserted.
Factory Preset
Chapter 5
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
(no *RST):
The factory default is On. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Serial Port RTS Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:CONTrol:RTS OFF|ON|IBFull
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:CONTrol:RTS?
Sets the hardware pacing (hand-shaking) scheme. Many high speed asynchronous
modems use this line (paired with CTS) as receive/transmit pacing. Only one
Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument.
Off - indicates that the RTS line should always be asserted
On - indicates that the RTS line should always be unasserted
IBFull - selects the input buffer full mode for the RTS line. IBFull sets the RTS
line to indicate when the device is ready to receive. When the number of
received bytes in the input buffer of the device reaches the stop threshold, the
device will unassert the RTS line. When the number of bytes has been reduced
to the start threshold, the device will assert RTS indicating that it can receive
input again. RTS is sometimes called RFR (ready for receiving). The device
will also monitor the state of CTS and will stop transmission if that line
becomes unasserted.
Factory Preset
(no *RST):
The factory default is IBFull. This parameter is persistent,
which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Serial Port Baud Rate Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1][:RECeive]:BAUD <baud_rate>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1][:RECeive]:BAUD?
Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument.
Factory Preset
(no *RST):
The factory default is 9600. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Range:
Supported baud rates are
110|300|600|1200|2400|4800|9600|19200|38400|
57600|115200
Front Panel
Access:
System, Remote Port
320
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Serial Port Receive Pace Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1][:RECeive]:PACE XON|NONE
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1][:RECeive]:PACE?
Set the receive pace to on or none for an instrument, with the RS-232 interface
installed. Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument. If no optional
serial port number is specified, port 1 is assumed.
Factory Preset
(no *RST):
The factory default is none. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Serial Port Transmit Pace Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:TRANsmit:PACE XON|NONE
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:TRANsmit:PACE?
Set the transmit pace to on or none for an instrument, with the RS-232 interface
installed. Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument. If no optional
serial port number is specified, port 1 is assumed.
Factory Preset
(no *RST):
The factory default is none. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Hardware Configuration Query
:SYSTem:CONFigure:HARDware?
Returns string of information about the current hardware in the instrument.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show Hardware
Display the Hardware Configuration
:SYSTem:CONFigure:HARDware:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:CONFigure:HARDware:STATe?
Shows the current hardware configuration of the instrument on the display.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show Hdwr
Chapter 5
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
System Configuration Query
:SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]?
Returns string of information about the configurations of the instrument.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
Display System Configuration
:SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]:STATe?
Shows the current system configuration of the instrument on the display.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
Set Date
:SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day>
:SYSTem:DATE?
Sets the date of the real-time clock of the instrument.
Year is a 4-digit integer
Month is an integer 1 to 12
Day is an integer 1 to 31 (depending on the month)
Front Panel
Access:
System, Time/Date, Set Date
Error Information Query
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
This command queries the earliest entry to the error queue and then deletes that
entry. *CLS clears the entire error queue.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show Errors
322
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Locate SCPI Command Errors
:SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose?
Adds additional information to the error messages returned by the
:SYSTem:ERRor?command. It indicates which SCPI command was executing
when the error occurred and what about that command was unacceptable.
<error number>,”<error message>;<annotated SCPI command>”
The maximum length of the <annotated SCPI command> is 80 characters. If the
error occurs in a SCPI command longer than 80 characters, the <Err> sentinel is
placed at the end of the <annotated SCPI command>.
Example:
First set SYST:ERR:VERBose ON
If the command SENSe:FREQuently:CENTer 942.6MHzis
sent, then sending SYST:ERR?returns:
−113,”Undefined header;SENSe:FREQuently:<Err>CENTer 942.6MHz $<NL>”
The <Err> shown after FREQuently shows you the spelling
error. (The $<NL> is the typical representation for the command
terminator.
If the command SENSe:FREQ:CENTer 942.6Secis sent,
then sending SYST:ERR?returns:
−131,”Invalid suffix;SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 942.6Sec<Err> $<NL>”
The <Err> shown after Sec shows you the invalid suffix.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Not affected by *RST
Remarks:
The verbose SCPI error debugging state is global to all the SCPI
interfaces.
History:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show Errors, Verbose SCPI ON OFF
Host Identification Query
:SYSTem:HID?
This command returns a string that contains the host identification. This ID is
required in order to obtain the license key that enables a new application or option.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
Chapter 5
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
License Key – Install Application/Option
:SYSTem:LKEY <“option”>, <“license key”>
:SYSTem:LKEY? <“option”>
This command enters the license key required for installing the specified new
application or option. The query returns a string that contains the license key for a
specified application or option that is already installed in the instrument. The
license key will also be returned if the application is not currently in memory, but
had been installed at some previous time.
Example:
:SYST:LKEY “BAC”, “123A456B789C”
An option is a three character string that specifies the option or
application that is to be installed, as found in the Ordering Guide
(for example, BAH for GSM Measurement Personality). The
option name must be enclosed in quotes.
A license key is a 12-character hexadecimal string given with
the option. The license key is unique to a specific option
installed in the instrument with a specific host ID, as returned by
:SYST:HID?. The license key must be enclosed in quotes.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Licensing
Delete a License Key
:SYSTem:LKEY:DELete <“option”>
This command allows you to delete the license key from instrument memory for
the selected option.
NOTE
In general, deleting the license key number is not recommended. If the license key
is deleted, you will be unable to reload or update the application in instrument
memory without re-entering the license key. The license key works with one
particular instrument host ID only.
Query Instrument Options
:SYSTem:OPTions?
Returns a list of the options that are installed.
It is a comma separated list such as: “1DS,1D6,A4H,A4J,1DN”
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
324
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Power On Elapsed Time
:SYSTem:PON:ETIMe?
Returns the number of seconds that have elapsed since the analyzer was turned on
for the very first time.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
Power On Time
:SYSTem:PON:TIME?
Returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since the analyzer was last
turned on.
Power On Type
:SYSTem:PON:TYPE PRESet|LAST
:SYSTem:PON:TYPE?
Sets the defined instrument conditions after a power-on or Preset.
PRESet - The instrument settings at power-on will be either the factory preset or
user preset, as set by :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE FACTory|USER.
LAST - The instrument settings at power-on will be the settings at the time of
power down.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is Preset. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Power On/Preset, Power On Last Preset
Enable IF/Video/Sweep Output Ports
:SYSTem:PORTs:IFVSweep:ENABle OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:PORTs:IFVSweep:ENABle?
This command enables or disables the IF, video, and sweep output ports for
analyzers having options A4J (IF, Sweep, and Video Ports) and AYX (Fast Time
Domain Sweeps).
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Example:
Range:
On
:SYST:PORT:IFVS:ENAB ON
On/Off
Chapter 5
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
History:
Added with firmware revision A.04.00.
Remarks:
Disable the output ports for faster measurement times.
Preset
:SYSTem:PRESet
Returns the instrument to a set of defined conditions. The particular set is selected
by :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE. This command does not change any persistent
parameters. The term persistent means that the command retains the setting
previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Preset
Persistent State Reset
:SYSTem:PRESet:PERSistent
Sets the persistent state values to their factory defaults. The term persistent means
that the command retains the setting previously selected, even through a power
cycle. Examples of persistent functions are: GPIB address, power-on type, and
preset type.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Restore Sys Defaults
Preset Type
:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE FACTory|USER|MODE
Selects the preset state to be either factory-defined or user-defined preset
conditions.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
The factory default is MODE. This parameter is persistent, which
means that it retains the setting previously selected, even
through a power cycle.
History:
Changed with firmware revision A.08.00. Previous firmware
revisions had default type FACTory.
Remarks:
:SYSTem:PRESet:USER:SAVEdefines the user preset.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Power On/Preset, Preset Type
326
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Save User Preset
:SYSTem:PRESet[:USER]:SAVE
Saves the current instrument conditions as the user preset condition.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Power On/Preset, Save Type Preset
Speaker Control
:SYSTem:SPEaker[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:SPEaker[:STATe]?
Turns the internal speaker on or off.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Off
Front Panel
Access:
Det/Demod, Demod, Speaker On Off
Set Time
:SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second>
:SYSTem:TIME?
Sets the time of the real-time clock of the instrument.
Hour must be an integer 0 to 23.
Minute must be an integer 0 to 59.
Second must be an integer 0 to 59.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Time/Date, Set Time
SCPI Version Query
:SYSTem:VERSion?
Returns the SCPI version number with which the instrument complies.
Chapter 5
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRACe Subsystem
TRACe Subsystem
The TRACe subsystem controls access to the internal trace memory of the
analyzer.
NOTE
Refer also to :CALCulateand :MMEMory subsystems for more trace and limit
line commands.
Copy Trace
:TRACe:COPY <source_trace>,<dest_trace>
Transfers the source trace to the destination trace and leaves the destination trace
in VIEW mode.
Source traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Destination traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Example:
:TRAC:COPY TRACE2,TRACE1
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Operations, 1 –> 3
View/Trace, Operations, 2 –> 3
Transfer Trace Data
:TRACe[:DATA] <trace_name>|RAWTRACE,<definite_length_
block>|<comma_separated_ASCII_data>
:TRACe[:DATA]? <trace_name> |RAWTRACE|LLINE1|LLINE2
This command transfers trace data from the controller to the instrument. The data
format is set by the command :FORMat [:TRACe][:DATA]. The data is
comma-separated ASCII values in ASCII formatting, and a definite length block in
REAL, INTeger, and UINTeger formatting.
The query returns the current values of the designated trace. The data is terminated
with <NL><END> (for GPIB that is newline, or linefeed, followed by EOI set
true; for RS-232 this is newline only.)
LLINE1 and LLINE2can only be queried; they cannot be set.
<trace_name> is TRACE1|2|3
328
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRACe Subsystem
NOTE
This command does not allow setting all trace points to the same amplitude value
by sending just a single value. If you need to set all trace points to the same value,
you must send the same value to each trace point.
Rawtrace data is available with UINT,16or INT,32formatting. It is unitless,
returns uncorrected ADC values, and is the fastest method of obtaining
measurement data.
Example:
Remarks:
:TRAC:DATA TRACE1,#41604<binary trace
data><LF–EOI>
Commands :MMEM:STOR:TRACand :MMEM:LOAD:TRACare
used to transfer trace data to, or from, the internal hard drive or
floppy drive of the instrument.
The number of points in a trace is specified by
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts. The trace data format is
determined by :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA], and the binary
data byte order is determined by :FORMat:BORDer.
If the parameter to the query is LLINE1or LLINE2, a very large
positive or negative value is returned at any point outside the
range of limit values. A large positive number is returned for an
upper limit, and a large negative value for lower limits. There is
no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1|LLINE2.
Exchange Traces
:TRACe:EXCHange <trace_1>,<trace_2>
Exchanges 2 traces, point by point and leaves both in VIEW mode.
Trace_1 choices are: TRACE1|2|3
Trace_2 choices are: TRACE1|2|3
Example:
:TRAC:EXCH TRACE3,TRACE2
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Operations, 1 <–> 3
View/Trace, Operations, 2 <–> 3
Trace Math Add
:TRACe:MATH:ADD
<destination_trace>,<source_trace1>,<source_trace2>
Adds the magnitudes of the two source traces and places the result in the
destination trace.
Destination traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Source traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Chapter 5
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRACe Subsystem
Example:
:TRAC:MATH:ADD TRACE2,TRACE1,TRACE3is equivalent
to : (trace 2 = trace 1 + trace 3)
Mean Trace Data
:TRACe:MATH:MEAN? <trace>
Returns the mean of the amplitudes of the trace amplitude elements in
measurement units.
Traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Query the Signal Peaks
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK[:DATA]?
Outputs the signal peaks by frequency or by amplitude. This command uses only
trace1 data.
The sort mode is determined by the command :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT. The
commands :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion and
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold are used to determine what is a signal
peak. To get the number of signals found meeting the specified limits, use the
query :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:POINts?
Query Number of Peaks Found
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:POINts?
Outputs the number of signal peaks identified. The amplitude of the peaks can then
be queried with :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:DATA? This command uses only trace1
data.
Peak Sorting
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT AMPLitude|FREQuency
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT?
Determines if the signals in the :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:DATA?query are sorted
by frequency or amplitude.
Amplitude sorts the identified peaks by descending amplitude.
Frequency sorts the identified peaks by increasing frequency.
Smooth Trace Data
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth <trace>
Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified in
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth:POINts. There is no equivalent front panel function.
Traces are: TRACE1|2|3, and RAWTRACE commands.
330
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRACe Subsystem
The purpose of this function is to perform a spatial video averaging as compared to
the temporal version supplied by the video-average command
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE VIDeo. The functions of :TRACe:MATH:SMOoth
<trace>and [:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE VIDeo|POWerare not
interchangeable.
Each point value is replaced with the average of the values of the selected number
of points, with half of those points located on each side of any particular point
smoothing number of 31. Think of the trace points as “buckets” of data. To smooth
(arbitrary) point 273, the analyzer averages buckets 258 through 287 and applies
that value to point 273.
Figure 5-5
Smoothing With 401 Trace Points and 31 Smoothing Points
Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost
of decreasing resolution.
The amount of smoothing decreases at the end points. Because
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth <trace>averages values that occur
before and after the data point in time, display irregularities can
be caused at the start and stop frequencies. To avoid possible
irregularities (signal distortion) at the ends of the trace, use
small values for the smooth parameter.
phenomena. With 31 smoothing points and a 401 point trace,
point 16 will be the first point to have full 31-bucket smoothing.
Likewise, point 385 will be the last point with full 31-bucket
smoothing. Under the conditions stated, points 2 through 15 will
be smoothed as follows: Point 2 is derived from averaging
buckets 1 through 3. Point 3 is derived from averaging buckets 1
through 5, Point 4 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through
7, and so forth until point 16 is reached. The quantity of buckets
used for the smoothing running average increases at the rate of 2
buckets per point, from point 1 to point ([smoothing number/2]
Chapter 5
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRACe Subsystem
+ 1), at which time the full number of smoothing points is
utilized. The same characteristic occurs at the completion of the
trace, beginning at point 386, when the number of averaging
buckets begins to decrease until point 401 is reached.
By replacing the value of each point in a trace with the average
of the values of a number of points centered about that point,
any rapid variations in noise or signals are smoothed into more
gradual variations. It thereby performs a function similar to
reducing the video bandwidth without the corresponding
changes in sweep time; as such, frequency resolution is
decreased. Also, signal peaks are reduced with large smoothing
values; and this can cause the amplitude to appear to be less than
its actual value.
Number of Points for Smoothing
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth:POINts <integer>
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth:POINts?
Specifies the number of points that will be smoothed in :TRACe:MATH:SMOoth.
See that command for an explanation of how smoothing is performed.
Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing
resolution. If the number of points is an even number, then the number of points is
increased by one. If the number of points is larger than the number of sweep
points, then the number of sweep points is used, unless the number of sweep points
is even, in which case the number of points will be the sweep points minus one.
The number of points smoothed is always an odd number.
Range:
Integer, 3 to current number of sweep points
Trace Math Subtract
:TRACe:MATH:SUBTract
<destination_trace>,<source_trace1>,<source_trace2>
Subtracts the magnitude of the two source traces (trace 1 − trace 2) and places the
result in the destination trace.
Destination traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Source traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Example:
:TRAC:MATH:SUBT TRACE3,TRACE3,TRACE2is equivalent
to: (trace 3 = trace 3 − trace 2)
332
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRACe Subsystem
Trace Math Subtract From Display Line
:TRACe:MATH:SUBTract:DLINe <trace>
Subtracts the magnitude of the display line from the selected trace and places the
result back in the selected trace.
Trace is: TRACE1|2|3
Example:
:TRAC:MATH:SUBT:DLIN TRACE1
is equivalent to: (trace1 = trace 1 − display line)
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Operations, 2 – DL –> 2
Select Trace Display Mode
:TRACe1|2|3:MODE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold|VIEW|BLANk
:TRACe1|2|3:MODE?
Selects the display mode for the selected trace.
Write puts the trace in the normal mode, updating the data.
Maximum hold displays the highest measured trace value for all the data that
has been measured since the function was turned on.
Minimum hold displays the lowest measured trace value for all the data that has
been measured since the function was turned on.
View turns on the trace data so that it can be viewed on the display.
Blank turns off the trace data so that it is not viewed on the display.
Remarks:
Whenever the number of sweep points change, the following
functions are affected:
•
•
All trace data is erased
Any traces in view mode will go to blank mode
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Clear Write
View/Trace, Max Hold
View/Trace, Min Hold
View/Trace, View
View/Trace, Blank
View/Trace, Normalize, Ref Trace View Blank
Chapter 5
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
TRIGger Subsystem
The TRIGger subsystem is used to set the controls and parameters associated with
triggering the data acquisitions. Other trigger-related commands are found in the
INITiate and ABORt subsystems.
External Trigger, Line Trigger Delay Value
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <delay>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay?
This command sets the amount of trigger delay when using the rear panel external
trigger input or the line trigger.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
1 µs
Range:
0.3 µs to 429 seconds
Default Unit:
seconds
External Trigger, Line Trigger Delay Enable
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe?
This command allows you to turn on or off a delay, during which the analyzer will
wait to begin a sweep after receiving an external trigger signal or a line trigger.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Default Unit:
Remarks:
Off
seconds
Free-run activates the trigger condition that allows the next
sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep. This
function is not available when Gate is on.
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, Trig Delay On Off
External Trigger Slope
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal[1]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal[1]:SLOPe?
This command activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start
when the external voltage (connected to GATE TRIG/EXT TRIG IN on the rear
panel) passes through approximately 1.5 volts. The external trigger signal must be
a 0 V to +5 V TTL signal. This function only controls the trigger polarity (for
positive or negative-going signals).
334
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Positive
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, External Pos Neg
Trigger Offset
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet <64 bit floating point value>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet?
This command sets the trigger offset.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Example:
Range:
0 seconds
:TRIG:SEQ:OFFS 1.0s
Hardware specific; dependent upon the ADC being used,
current state, and the number of sweep points.
Default Unit:
Remarks:
seconds
Trigger offset refers to the specified time interval before or after
the trigger event from which data is to be written to the trace,
and then displayed. Ordinarily, the trigger offset value is zero,
and trace data is displayed beginning at the trigger event. A
negative trigger offset value results in the display of trace data
prior to the trigger event. A positive trigger offset value results
in an effective delay in the display of trace data after the trigger
event.
The trigger offset value used when the feature is enable will
depend on the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
Normal trigger offset value originally entered
Specific instrument hardware in use
Sweep time
Number of sweep points
The effective trigger offset value will be re-calculated whenever
any of these parameters change.
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, Trig Offset
Chapter 5
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
Trigger Source
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce IMMediate|VIDeo|LINE|EXTernal
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?
Specifies the source (or type) of triggering used to start a measurement.
Immediate is free-run triggering
Video triggers on the video signal level
Line triggers on the power line signal
External allows you to connect an external trigger source
Factory Preset
and *RST:
Immediate (free-run triggering)
Remarks:
Free-run activates the trigger condition that allows the next
sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep.
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, Free Run
Trig, Video
Trig, Line
Trig, External Pos Neg
NOTE
Trigger Delay is not available in Free Run, so turning Free Run on turns off
Trigger Delay, but preserves the value of Trigger Delay.
Video Trigger Level Amplitude
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <ampl>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel?
Specifies the level at which a video trigger will occur.
Factory Preset
and *RST:.
2.5 divisions below reference level
Range:.
10 display divisions below reference level to reference level
current amplitude units
Default Unit:.
Remarks:.
Video is adjusted using this command, but must also be selected
using the command :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
VIDeo. When in FM Demod and Demod View is on, the Video
Trigger level is adjusted/queried using the command
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency
<freq>.
. NOTE
Trigger Delay is not available in Video trigger mode, so turning Video on turns off
Trigger Delay, but preserves the value of Trigger Delay.
336
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:.
Trig, Video
Video Trigger Level Frequency
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency<freq>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency?
This command is used to adjust the Video Trigger level when in FM Demod, and
Demod View is on.
Default Unit:
Remarks:
Hz
Video is adjusted using this command, but must also be selected
using the command :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
VIDeo. When not in FM Demod, the Video Trigger level is
adjusted/queried using the command
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <ampl>.
NOTE
Trigger Delay is not available in Video trigger mode, so turning Video on turns off
Trigger Delay, but preserves the value of Trigger Delay.
Chapter 5
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Reference
UNIT Subsystem
UNIT Subsystem
Select Power Units of Measure
:UNIT:POWer DBM|DBMV|DBUV|DBUA|V|W|A
:UNIT:POWer?
Specifies amplitude units for the input, output and display.
Factory Preset
and *RST:
dBm in log amplitude scale
volts in linear amplitude scale
History:
Ampere and decibel microampere units are available only with
instruments having firmware revision A.06.00 and later.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, dBm
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, dBmV
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, dBµV
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, Volts
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, Watts
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, Amps
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, dBµA
338
Chapter5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Agilent 8590/EMC Analyzers Programming Conversion Guide
NOTE
Please remove this page and insert the wire-O bound Programming Conversion
Guide here, Agilent Part Number E7401-90035.
340
Chapter6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Symbols
B
Numerics
A
bandwidth
alignment
resolution BW
amplitude
video BW
correction
baud rate
C
attenuation
C language
automeasure
averaging
on/off
calibration
Index
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
FM
dwell time
frequency
reference
E
errors
span
event status
G
gate trigger
F
fetch
GPIB
files
Index
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
H
I
IEEE commands
M
markers
input
band-type
instrument
frequency
frequency counter
L
limit lines
peak search
344
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
O
offsets
outputs
max/min view
on/off
measurement
P
peak search
return results
peaks
mixer
N
power
Index
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
power sweep
Q
quasi-peak
tracking generator
queries
power-on
peaks
printing
R
reference
level
registers
programming commands
programming examples
resolution bandwidth
346
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
RF
signal peaks
RS-232 bus
signals
comment set
S
SCPI
source
See also tracking generator
span
serial bus
service request
standard event
service request enable register
signal list
states, setting
Index
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
test limits
time
status byte
status registers
trace
averaging
stop
sweep time
tracking generator
power
system configuration
power sweep
T
348
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
trigger
external
video trigger
W
U
Y
y-axis
V
video bandwidth
Index
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|